Home

EN / ACH550-01 User`s Manual Rev E - inverter - plc

1. Eee van 125 4 92 212 8 33 369 14 53 410 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R2 IP21 UL Type 1 922 2 0 88 328 2 1111 635 1 38 PAD 92 ABB 9 Da 4 E LL D _ E ES Y Technical data 222 8 74 411 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R3 IP21 UL Type 1 922 2 0 88 944 1 73 050 1 98 205 799 731 19 10 SE S C N J W prj co Y Lo i 412 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R4 IP21 UL Type 1 644 1 73 0 88 1 98 2602 105350 596 235 45 689 27 12 ITI gt
2. 230 run time trigger parameter a 230 status information sess taras dte e QUEE 64 temperature data parameter 162 dual setpoint PID application macro 108 dual setpoint PID with constant speeds appl macro 110 434 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual E earth fault fa lt code i mea boss doe bd sn x XC aided s 356 parameter creara exeo eret qued par 236 e bypass application macro oooooooo ooo 112 EFB embedded fieldbus 130 132 additional delay Modbus only parameter 136 BACnet specific communication parameters 136 baud rate parameter 0 cee eee 134 287 communication parameters llus 134 config file fault code 2 sashes eves tke oy Pa Fawkes 357 CONNECCION s irte Gude dro AD tcp de a 132 CON MO le Z aE aere eot Re RR dn cee eee ali oe 131 control profile parameter 135 287 CRC errors count parameter 135 288 drive control parameters cece eee 143 fault CODES oan arras a Genre 152 357 OK messages count parameter 135 287 Dalamelerss ice au cer DA ee rete 136 288 289 parity parameter llle 135 287 protocol id parameter eee 134 287 protocol select parameter 134 313 protocol SeleotlOrtoe x sepe xes cs e o wa b P Sex ee X EY S 134 protocol parameter group 000 eee oo 287 DIOIOCOIS
3. 252 temperature measurement parameter group 249 temperature sensor selection parameter 252 temperature sensor type parameter 251 temperature data parameter 166 thermal protection x se edet Rd RR Reds 392 thermal protection fault parameter 233 thermal time fault parameter 234 motor control IR compensation parameters 227 parameter QrOUp sa o2 eh ee HERR A 226 motors PEA Daraifieler 6 4 4 dua A Ra dub irte dos 312 mounting control panel operator keypad 402 IP54 panel mounting kit o o o oooooooo 402 IP66 panel extension cable kit 403 mounting drive croata EA 37 GIMENSIONS cen eere SC Debo eet e a 400 Pa Wit iran ae Baraca lot tee t pe iE 41 lao prr 40 location preparing esee rb ete te x s 37 COW Decano de Reo ded ee RAI dua uM ao dede a 401 suitable location ua acre qe a RE Lie RE arce 23 template 2 5 soe reru Heb deos edet ot est o tet 9 37 MWh calculated intake energy data parameter 166 counter data parameter a 165 drive power consumption counter parameter 231 drive power consumption trigger parameter 231 Index 441 ACH550 01 User s Manual N noise smoothing parameter a n naana ee eee 229 iri reu PET PEDE 396 O off button alarm code aea 366 offset
4. 243 HESUOMVIRONIMON os kaaa nti aos Yat IG UR THESE ag ea Ped erue 420 first start alarm code eii Gu ve ERR EXE 367 FlashDrop application macro parameter 158 COMMECHON edeni la kh Le ee d oed es 42 parameter view parameter n nannaa aanne nna 204 floating network see IT system floating point application macro eee 106 flux braking parameter llle 226 flux optimization enable parameter 226 TOrco trips fault COU Se towne eat aote ede ede t etd ae adc oce da 357 frame errors count parameter 286 amo PDC 17 frequency at fault history parameter o o o o oooooooo 171 max limit parameter eee 211 min limit parametek paaa knee ee aa REN 210 switching parameter 0 0c cee eee eee 228 fuses input power mains a 381 208 240 V ONVES ion kan e an eke eed alee es 383 380 480 V dives os eo zu tt each ALAN HG EE ISES 382 Index 437 ACH550 01 User s Manual G gain PID parameter uae t eG AA ia 267 H hand control see HAND mode hand control application MacrO o oooooo 114 HAND mode cosas ade Sean dol cae Be 64 65 hardware description 0 00000 cece eee eee 394 RTT lel 35 d qt ous tese v s not MAL teftes reco bot ila choke G 381 heatsink Malena Laces coe fi saad Par edd dra 369 maintenance interval eee 368 hood see top cover HVAC default application
5. Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual IP66 panel extension cable kit Use the panel extension cable kit option to mount the panel on a cabinet door to maintain the IP66 degree of protection The kit includes a 3 meter extension cable cap mounting template thread inserts and mounting screws The figure below shows how to mount the control panel with the cap Technical data 403 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R1 IP54 UL Type 12 CERE 234 8 74 3 21 18 13 461 404 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R2 IP54 UL Type 12 222 x is 246 374 9 69 i p t m 9 S X e 361 22 09 Technical data 405 40 ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame
6. Technical data 413 40 ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R5 IP21 UL Type 1 265 286 43 lai je 0 43 11 24 T 1 gH 8 B zm CD awe Mao e5 e o co OAL d aes 1 Y 414 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R6 IP21 UL Type 1 880 Technical data 415 40 ACH550 01 User s Manual Ambient conditions The following table lists the ACH550 environmental requirements Ambient environment requirements Installation site Storage and transportation in the protective package e 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Py and lon derated 1 for every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft 2000 4000 m 6 600 13 200 ft Contact your local ABB representative Ambient temperature No frost allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F 400 V drives See the available currents in 15 50 C 5 122 F in the table on page 379 200 V drives 15 40 5 104 F max 50 C 122 F if Py and lau derated to 90 Relative humidity lt 95 non condensing Contamination levels e No conductive dust allowed Storage IEC 721 3 3 e The ACH550 should be No conductive dust allowed installed in clean air Chemical gases Class 1C2 according to enclosure Solid particles
7. ACH550 01 User s Manual Suitable environment and enclosure 22 Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See section Ambient conditions on page 416 Confirm that the enclosure degree of protection is appropriate based on the site containment level P21 type enclosure The site must be free from airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as dripping water condensation carbon dust and metallic particles P54 type enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the IP21 enclosure the IP54 enclosure has e the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure adifferent outer plastic cover e an additional internal fan to improve cooling larger dimensions e the same rating does not require a derating If for some reason an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or cover or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or top cover see the note on page 419 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Suitable mounting location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth non flammable solid surface and in a suit
8. 244 display units parameters eee eee 246 I d S uocum uy OBS Ut eee et encre ee a eek td ee 63 OUR Tai tech otc ade Ee Dates sce ave 402 parameter lock parameter o 197 pass code parameter n a 0c eee eee ees 198 reference control parameter 176 signal max parameters 000 cee eee eee 245 signal min parameters 245 COON eee o a E CUN 397 fan maintenance trigger parameter 230 432 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual fan run time counter parameter nonan nanna 230 fan run time trigger parameter 230 cooling tower fan application macro 94 corner grounded TN system warning about EMC filters 0 0000 eee 7 correction source PID parameter 282 counter cooling fan run time parameter 230 drive power consumption parameter 231 drive run time parameter l l 230 motor revolutions parameter 230 CRC errors count parameter oo 286 critical soeeds avoiding high parameters ova err NG LANANG NA 224 low parameters x sco tone seach CR SOROR e i 224 parameter Group erei usce br eH BAD bere 224 select parameter cece eee ees 224 C Tick Marin ean sext Suis oie Per ed a oce a 419 current at fault history parameter ee eee 171 dala Paramore eee EY EN 162 max limit parameter 00
9. o A A M N Po o Oo Q O Ed Ed v D O c SE OX ma gt D rd Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control Par Lor jos jos Jos os 12 n n ae NOT SEL vo NOT SEL NOT set NOT SEL ola e e j a la j e e sz EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN Parameter listing and descriptions 349 ACH550 01 User s Manual 350 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Diagnostics and maintenance What this chapter contains This chapter contains information on fault diagnostics fault correction resetting and maintaining the drive WARNING Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNING All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructions on page 6 must be followed Diagnostics and maintenance 351 ACH550 01 User s Manual Diagnostics displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using green and red LED on the body of the drive status LED on the control panel if a HVAC control panel is attached to the d
10. 176 see also control panel kWh calculated intake energy data parameter 166 counter data paraMeter o ooo ooooooooo 163 L labels 29a t i deed iun da tmt eet DRE EU doa i itas 14 language parameter 00 ees 158 zo eE E 59 352 GCC 2555s ma aaa Dana oa d avs ae a toe dut 353 Bares ca ois cea ae aee eun APO dard pe ace 352 362 lifting the dve tos eb tg REIS Mamata 10 limits parameter droup 000 c eee eee 209 load curve see user load curve load frequency see user load curve load torque see user load curve loading package version data parameter 243 local control see HAND mode local control HAND mode lock parameter 148 200 low frequency PFA parameters n n unnan anaana 293 M MATOS a eens Ate aoe AA f 85 booster pump iod EA ole eee erties 98 Condenser ira term dA don RUE Ur C ARLAN EE 96 cooling tower fan accorde tre ADOS ES 94 dual setpoint PID crap ERE IR C IP Rte 108 dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 110 aUe a cbe tees AA 112 floating pOint E CEP 106 hand controls iss due o ER ees SR cl de e an 114 HVAC QUIE 88 internal imer td tia dut ho 102 internal timer with constant speeds 104 powered roof ventilator o o ooo oooo 104 Index 439 ACH550 01 User s Manual pump alternation vu seen baer a ERE E ES 100 POULIN TAM ao D eene tta Poet atte aro ie a A 92 S pply DM cT 90 maintenan
11. Code Description Range 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Minimum value refers to the minimum content AO CONTENT value that will be converted to an P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 analogue output These P 1505 parameters P 1511 content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for P 1504 the output See P 1510 the figure AO CONTENT l P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analogue output 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for A01 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified See the figure for parameter 1303 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 159 Defines the content for analogue output AO2 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above Parameter listing and descriptions 195 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 20 0 mA Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM
12. L HAH EE AGND Analogue input circuit common SE 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al a RE Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit common LL posue mu AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pz GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 mu 17 DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 3 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 176 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Constant speed 1 par 1202 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 91 ACH550 01 User s Manual 3
13. Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 89 ACH550 01 User s Manual 2 Supply fan 90 This application macro is for supply fan applications where the supply fan brings fresh air into the room according to the signals received from the transducer See the figure below When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended AKV V Copyright 2007 ABB Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Supply fan Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 1 SCR an S AH
14. 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time fout A t A speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP DEC IN AUX START 0 0 1800 s Sets the PFA deceleration time for a maximum to zero frequency ramp This PFA deceleration ramp applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time Parameter listing and descriptions 311 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range TIMED AUTOCHANGE 0 4 Sets the autochange with timer When enables autochange is controlled with the timed functions 0 NOT SEL 1 TIMER 1 Enables autochange when timer 1 is active 2 4 TIMER 2 4 Enables autochange when timer 2 4 is active 8127 IMOTORS 1 7 Sets the actual number of P
15. 100 0 100 0 100 0 1108 Parameter listing and descriptions 321 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 322 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index MINIMUN AH 1301 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 MAXIMUM Al1 1302 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 FILTER AI 1303 MINIMUM AI2 1304 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 MAXIMUM AI2 1305 100 096 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1401 READY STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED RELAY OUTPUT 2 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1403 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT RO 1 ON DELAY 1404 RO 1 OFF DELAY 1405 RO 2 ON DELAY 1406 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 2 OFF DELAY 1407 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 3 ON DELAY 1408 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 3 OFF DELAY 1409 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RELAY OUTPUT 4 1410 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL RELAY OUTPUT 5 1411 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL RELAY OUTPUT 6 1412 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL RO 4 ON DELAY 1413 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 4 OFF DELAY 1414 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 5 ON DELAY 1415 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 5 OFF DELAY 1416 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s RO 6 ON DELAY 1417 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0
16. Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0 600 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 0 600 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 oe TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 0 600 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition point 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 260 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 0 600 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5
17. Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual E Range 03 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 0 Example An ACH550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases the first auxiliary constant speed pump starts to operate then the second one As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motor
18. Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT EXT REF 1 MAX 2V 4mA AKA EXT REF 1 MIN EXT REF 1 MIN Hysteresis 4 of full scale 178 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4 Al2 JOYST Defines analogue input 2 AI2 configured for joystick operation as the reference source See above AI2 JOYST description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the u stands for up e Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DISU 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored e When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DIBU 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 co
19. aa 163 dimensional drawings eee eee 399 frame size R1 IP21 UL Type 1 410 frame size R1 IP54 UL Type 12 404 frame size R2 IP21 UL Type 1 411 frame size R2 IP54 UL Type 12 405 frame size R3 IP21 UL Type 1 412 frame size R3 IP54 UL Type 12 406 frame size R4 IP21 UL Type 1 413 frame size R4 IP54 UL Type 12 407 frame size R5 IP21 UL Type 1 414 frame size R5 IP54 UL Type 12 408 frame size R6 IP21 UL Type 1 415 frame size RE IP54 UL Type 12 409 GIIMENSIONS scelere oue tas ALAALA 399 control panel operator keypad 402 MOUMING2 at mh Dre ano 400 direction control parameter ou x Eur Rar Ro EI 143 175 lock alarm Code i vcio ret A 364 display alarms parameter cria s 203 see also panel display downloading parameters 0c cece eee eee 73 drive id fa lt a ac ct due wae heute E dete Saha oes RT 357 maintenance trigger parameter 230 231 on time data parameters a 166 JA nae ere aene a a a 65 parameter backup mode 73 power consumption counter parameter 231 power consumption trigger parameter 231 rating parameter pada wa ad eim A te cic gemma ae 243 run time counter parameter
20. 0 DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory 200 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range START ENABLE 1 6 7 Selects the source of the Start enable 1 signal See the figure on page 202 Note Start enable functionality differs from the Run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the Start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for Start enable 1 signal e f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the control panel display The drive will not start until Start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the Start enable 1 signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the Start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of Command Word 2 parameter 0302 activates the Start disable 1 signal e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the Start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the Start enable 1 signal See DI1 INV above efesotomasyon com Parameter listing and descriptions 201
21. 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz OUTPUT 1 3404 DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT OUTPUT 1 Yo Yo Yo Yo Yo Yo 0 name SIGNAL 1 Co Co B eo al wo UNIT OUTPUT 1 3406 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUTPUT 1 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 0 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 Co Az I SIGNAL 2 3408 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 0 0 0 0 wo AR a o U no lal a a OUTPUT 2 3411 DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT OUTPUT 2 UNIT A OUTPUT 2 0 0A OUTPUT 2 0 0 SIGNAL 3 A A a AMOS EI oon ooa ooa om an an com oo oo o A 11 A 11 A OA A 0 0 0 SIGNAL 3 MIN SIGNAL 3 341 Yo Yo A wo w O lG W AR KR p Eh un RUN la a N O Rh Po OUTPUT 3 1 3418 DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT OUTPUT 3 UNIT 3419 V mA V mA V mA V mA V mA V mA 1 OUTPUT 3 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V MIN 2 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA OUTPUT 3 10 0 V 10 0 V 10 0 V 10 0 V 10 0 V 10 0 V 3421 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA SENSOR TYPE 50 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 503 0 0 0 0 0 0 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 3504 0 0 0 0 0 0
22. 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DI4 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using D14 and DI5 See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DIG See above DI1 2 INV for code 12 DI1 2 3 INv Selects one of seven constant speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DIS Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated No constant speed onstant speed 1 1202 C Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 1 0 O Constant speed 6 1207 o 0 0 Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven constant speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DIB e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven constant speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code Parameter listing and descriptions 185 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets value for constant speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE e Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED e Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 0 30000 rpm FI 0 500 Hz 1208 Each sets a
23. 968 2456 7406 Pakistan Lahore Tel 92 42 6315 882 85 Fax 92 42 6368 565 Panama Panama City Tel 507 209 5400 Tel 507 209 5408 Fax 507 209 5401 Peru Lima Tel 51 1 561 0404 Fax 51 1 561 3040 The Philippines Metro Manila Tel 632 821 7777 824 4581 Fax 63 2 824 4637 824 6616 Poland Lodz Tel 48 42 299 3000 Fax 48 42 299 3340 Portugal Oeiras Tel 351 21 425 6000 Fax 351 21 425 6390 Fax 4351 21 425 6354 Qatar Doha Tel 974 4253888 Fax 4974 4312630 Romania Bucharest Tel 4021 310 4377 Fax 440 21 310 4383 Russia Moscow Tel 7495 960 2200 Fax 7 495 960 2201 Saudi Arabia Al Khobar Tel 966 0 3 882 9394 ext 240 254 247 Fax 4966 0 3 882 4603 Senegal Dakar Tel 221 832 1242 Tel 221 832 3466 Fax 4221 832 2057 832 1239 Serbia Belgrade Tel 381 11 3094 320 Tel 381 11 3094 300 Fax 4381 11 3094 343 Singapore Singapore Tel 65 6776 5711 Fax 465 6778 0222 Slovakia Banska Bystrica Tel 421 48 410 2324 Fax 421 48 410 2325 426 ACH550 01 User s Manual Slovenia Ljubljana Tel 4386 1 2445 440 Fax 4386 1 2445 490 South Africa Johannesburg Tel 27 11 617 2000 Fax 27 11 908 2061 South Korea Seoul Tel 82 2 528 2794 Fax 82 2 528 2338 Spain Barcelona Tel 34 9 3 728 8700 Fax 34 9 3 728 8743 Sri Lanka Colombo Tel 94 11 2399304 6 Fax 494 11 2399303 Sweden V ster s Tel 46 0 21 32 90 00
24. 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 14 0 4 Selects an application macro or loads or saves a parameter set Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACH550 for a particular application 1 HVAC DEFAULT 2 SUPPLY FAN 3 RETURN FAN 4 COOLING TOWER FAN 5 CONDENSER 6 BOOSTER PUMP 7 PUMP ALTERNATION 8 INTERNAL TIMER 9 INTERNAL TIMER WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 10 FLOATING POINT 11 DUAL SETPOINT PID 12 DUAL SETPOINT PID WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 13 E BYPASS 14 HAND CONTROL 31 LOAD FD SET 0 USER S1 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2 LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 4 OR SET LOAD 1 14 Selects an application macro 31 LOAD FD SET Activates FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the downloaded FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives The FlashDrop allows easy customizing of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual SAFE68591074 English 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE Saves a user parameter set into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run 0 USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD Takes a user parameter set back in use 4 OR SET LOAD Loads the override parameter set manua
25. ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 12 kHz Sets the switching frequency for the drive Higher switching frequencies mean less noise Available switching frequencies according to the drive power Power kW 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 45 10 x x x ERASE 2 AE a SWITCH FREQ CTRL OZOFF 1 ON Activates the switching frequency control When active the selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Is limited when the drive internal temperature increases See the figure below This function allows the highest possible switching frequency at a specific operating point Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise 0 OFF The function is disabled 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the figure 0 75 37 kW 45 110 kW Drive temperature 100 C SLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 Sets gain for slip compensation in e A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 228 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING O DISABLE 1 ENABLE This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the aco
26. Assigns Start Stop control to timer 1 Timer activated START Timer de activated STOP See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 14 TIMER 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to timer 2 4 See TIMER 1 above 174 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above DIRECTION 1 3 Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Parameter listing and descriptions 175 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT This group defines how the drive selects between command sources characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Panel REF 2 PID 1 OUT REF 2 Hand Auto Selection HAND gas eee Aa AUTO P1103 DI Al es Se ee a TRE WM c Description 1101 IKEYPAD REF SEL 1 REF 1 Hz rpm 2 REF 2 Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED Frequency reference Hz if 9904 2 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 176 Parameter listing and descript
27. CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1507 p 1s Dan are srr eae rar ru at ae a 100 0 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 1509 lo o o o o o o o fil DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT 1611 Parameter listing and descriptions 325 17 OVERRIDE 20 LIMITS 21 START STOP 326 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Par index 1701 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL OVERRIDE SPEED 1703 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm OVERR PASS 1704 OVERRIDE SPEED 1706 FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD OVERRIDE 1707 CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT MINIMUM SPEED 2001 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm MAXIMUM 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 SPEED 2002 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm MAX CURRENT 2003 OFF D O moj oo O m O D lm lt m m rH O mm rm o m Om DIPS 2 2 Q U iw O m m a UNDERVOLT ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE CTRL 2006 TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME MINIMUM FREQ 2007 0 0Hz 0 0Hz 0 0Hz 00Hz 0 0Hz 0 0Hz MAXIMUM 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 FREQ 2008 60 0Hz 60 0Hz 60 0Hz 60 0Hz 60 0Hz 60 0Hz MIN TORQUE MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN SEL 2013 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 T
28. Co AR eo A A 0 0 0 0 Co PARAM DSP FORM PARAM DSP FORM PARAM DSP FORM INPUT A 11 11 11 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 11 gt E gt ES E df BB FAULT LIMIT Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control E lelali ed OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 3401 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0 Hz 340 DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT 340 00 oox 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 833 3 340 CURRENT CURRENT 3408 ooa ooa sao go og had o ER oimtor DIRECT san A s HY Cola sla ee ar 00 100 0 DIRECT Vin 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V En 00 mi 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 200 0 200 0 20 0 mA 20 0 mA NONE NONE sso P ss Al 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 350 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 130 C 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 oh
29. DISABLE DISABLE AR OVER VOLTAGE 3105 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE AR UNDER VOLTAGE 3106 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE AR AI MIN 3107 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE AR EXTERNAL FLT 3108 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE SUPERV 1 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT PARAM 3201 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ SUPERV 1 LIM LO 3202 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz SUPERV 1 LIM HI 3203 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz SUPERV 2 PARAM 3204 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT SUPERV 2 LIM LO 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 3206 SUPERV 3 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT PARAM 3207 TORQUE FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ SUPERV 3 LIM LO 3208 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 3209 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware FIRMWARE 3301 version version version version version version LOADING PACKAGE 3302 TEST DATE 3303 igi al a ag NHIEU DRIVE RATING 3304 PARAMETER Par table Par table Par table Par table Par table Par table TABLE 3305 version Version version version version version Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID
30. Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 On Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 and 8109 START FREQ 1 Parameter listing and descriptions 293 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 8113 ILOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 Hz Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if two auxiliary motors are running ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 0 0 500 Hz Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if e three auxiliary motors are running ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 s Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors he output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit par
31. or 1608 START ENABLE 1 from an auxiliary contact of the isolator to the ACH550 Note Wiring is discussed in more detail in chapter nstalling the drive Preparing for installation 27 ACH550 01 User s Manual Cabling instructions Keep individual unscreened wires between the cable clamps and the screw terminals as short as possible Route control cables away from power cables Input power mains cables See sections nput power mains cable fuses and circuit breakers on page 381 and Input power mains cable on page 386 Motor cables See section Motor connection on page 389 for the maximum motor cable lengths meeting the IEC EN 61800 3 requirements for category C2 or C3 as applicable The figure below shows the minimum requirements for the motor cable screen Concentric layer of copper wire 28 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows non recommended motor cable types NK CABLES Figures courtesy of Draka NK Cables Copyright 2003 Draka NK Cables The figure below shows the recommended conductor layout Recommended CE amp C Tick Allowed CE amp C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three A separate PE conductor is phase conductors and a concentric or required if the conductivity of the otherwise symmetrically constructed PE cable shield is 5096 of the conductor and a shield conductivity of the phase PE Shield conductor AK conductor and shiel
32. 600 for torque External reference REF2 in 0113 CTRL LOCATION O HAND 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 Active control location Alternatives are 0 HAND 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 RUN TIME R 0 9999 h Drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when in the Parameters mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 9999 kWh Drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when in the Parameters mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 100 0 600 for torque Application block output signal Value is from either e PFA control if PFA Control is active or parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs Status is displayed as a binary number 1 indicates that the input is activated O indicates that the input is deactivated DI1 DI2 DIS 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs e See parameter 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS 0120 AI 1 0 10096 Relative value of analogue input 1 in 96 0121 AI 2 0 10096 Relative value of analogue input 2 in 96 Parameter listing and descriptions 163 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS 0 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three relay outputs 1 indicates that the relay is energized O indicates that the relay is de energized RELAY 1 STATUS
33. ACT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 sqrt ACT1 2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 SqA1 SqA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 sqrt AcT1 Square root of the value for ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 000 NOT SEL Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x JACT1 ACT2 Parameter listing and
34. Class 1S2 classification Transportation Cooling air must be clean No conductive dust allowed free from corrosive Chemical gases 2C2 materials and free from Solid particles Class 252 electrically conductive dust Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles Class 382 Sinusoidal vibration Mechanical conditions s In accordance with ISTA 1A IEC 60068 2 6 Class 3M4 IEC60721 3 3 and 1B specifications 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock IEC 68 2 29 Not allowed Max 100 m s 330 ft s 11 ms Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61 cm 24 in frame size R2 46 cm 18 in frame size R3 31 cm 12 in frame size R4 25 cm 10 in frame size R5 15 cm 6 in frame size R6 416 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal Material specifications PC ABS 2 5 mm colour NCS 1502 Y or NCS 7000 N Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers If the surface is painted the total thickness of the coating zinc and paint is 80 100 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Corrugated board drives and option modules expanded polystyrene Plastic covering of the package PE LD bands PP or steel The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can b
35. Defined by Defined by Defined by MAX 1509 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 par 0104 1511 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0 mA CONTROLS PARAMETER LOCK 1602 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN T 1604 KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD USER PAR SET CHG 1605 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL LOCAL LOCK 1606 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 1607 DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE START 1608 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 START 1609 NOT SEL DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 ALARMS 1610 R VIEW 1611 DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT MINIMUM AO2 FILTER AO2 RUN ENABLE PASS COD on mo me pu m 02 m ojm m U oz Z gt OLEI SPD rZ UD UJ gt Tl E lt xm m N D gt lt m Re gt pol gt m 4o m 324 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control ar 7 index OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 1501 1502 52 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 62 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 1503 1504 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 20 0 mA 1505 0 PID 1 FBK CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
36. Input activated Input deactivated DI active Boost active Boost time 126 Real time clock and timed functions ACH550 01 User s Manual To configure the boost follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys Then press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Scroll to group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Scroll to BOOST SEL with the UP DOWN keys and press EDIT Select a digital input as the source of the boost signal with the UP DOWN keys Then press SAVE Scroll to BOOST TIME with the UP DOWN keys and press EDIT Real time clock and timed functions 127 ACH550 01 User s Manual 7 Change the highlighted part of the time with the UP DOWN keys Pressing NEXT moves to the next part Press SAVE to save the time Scroll to TIMER 1 SRC and press EDIT DOWN keys and press SAVE i Select BOOST with the UP menu 10 The new value is displayed under TIMER 1 SRC Press EXIT to return to the main 128 Real time clock and timed functions ACH550 01 User s Manual Serialcommunications What this chapter contains This chapter contains the information for the serial communications of the ACH550 Serial communications 129 ACH550 01 User s Manual System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus controller either Via the standard RS485 interface at terminals X1
37. N 0 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz 0 5 10 10 10 10 10 300 300 300 300 300 25 30 25 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 15 15 15 15 15 300 300 300 300 300 43 Hz 43 Hz 43 Hz 43 Hz 43 Hz 25 25 25 25 25 300 300 300 300 300 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 30 30 30 30 30 300 300 300 300 300 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 30 30 30 30 30 300 300 300 300 300 Parameter listing and descriptions 339 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 340 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index INTEGRATION TIME 4002 3 0s 10 0s 10 0s 3 0s 3 0s 3 0s DERIVATION TIME 4003 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s PID DERIV FILTER 4004 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s ERROR VALUE INV 4005 NO NO NO NO YES NO IS o e D UNIT SCALE 4007 0 VALUE 4008 0 Yo VALUE 4009 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 SET POINT SEL 4010 KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD o o SETPNT 4011 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 SETPOINT MIN 012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SETPOINT 4013 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 m a gt g js 3 x lt m e D P 5 pA MULTIPLIER 0 0 ACT1 MINIMUM 4018 Yo Yo Yo Yo 0 0 ACT1 MAXIMUM 4019 100 100 100 100 100 100 ACT2 MINIMUM 4020 Yo Yo Yo Yo 0 0 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4021 100 100 100 100 100 100 SL
38. Note 1 lock is active Disable the local control mode with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK and retry 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is See active which means that the motor could Note 1 accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 Performing ID run Override mode activated 2021 START ENABLE This alarm warns that the Start enable 1 signal is 1 MISSING missing To control Start enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check digital input configuration communication settings 2022 START ENABLE This alarm warns that the Start enable 2 signal is 2 MISSING missing To control Start enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check digital input configuration communication settings 2023 Edi Emergency stop activated Edi 366 366 Diagnostics and maintenance and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Alarm m 2025 FIRST START Signals that the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models voltage Check input power line fuses 2026 INPUT PHASE The intermediate DC circuit DC voltage is LOSS oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse The alarm is generated when the DC volta
39. Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay i First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Free Not allowed DI2 Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Not allowed ot allowed 1 2 3 4 Parameter listing and descriptions 305 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled DI3 Free Not allowed Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free MEE DI1 DI3 Free DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay DI5 First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay DI6 Second PFA Relay Free Not allowed DI3 Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Not allowed Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay DI5 First PFA Relay DI6 Free DI6 Free 1 2 3 306 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlo
40. Upload to Control Download control panel user set 1 2 panel rrr Downloading the parameters in a user set from one drive to simi lar drives using the same application running identical motors 74 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual To upload parameters to the control panel follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to UPLOAD TO PANEL and press SEL Text Copying parameters and a progress diagram are displayed Press ABORT if you want to stop the process Text Parameter upload successful is displayed Press OK to return to the PAR BACKUP menu Press EXIT twice to go to the main menu Now you can disconnect the control panel Start up and control panel 75 ACH550 01 User s Manual To download the full set of parameters to a drive follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN keys Scroll to DOWNLOAD FULL SET and press SEL Text Downloading parameters full set is displayed Press ABORT if you want to stop the process After the download stops the message Parameter download successfully completed is displayed Press OK to return to the PAR BACKUP menu Press EXIT twice to go to the main menu 76 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual To download the application partial parameter set to a dri
41. Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed 101 159 Displays parameter 0101 0159 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a P 3404 P 3405 P 3401 137 P 3408 138 P 3415 139 244 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a group 01 parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display Note Selecting units does not convert values Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT Display value P 3407 P 3406 Source P3402 P3403 Value SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT Parameter listing and descriptions 245 ACH550 01 User s Manual 3404 OUTPUT
42. actual signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 150 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 7 Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 Value is not scaled 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 Value is not scaled 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 Value is not scaled 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 Value is not scaled Code Description Range 4110 These parameters belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation is 4114 lanalogous with set 1 parameters 4010 4014 4016 and 4017 Serial communications 151 ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault handling The ACH550 indicates all faults in clear text and fault number in the control panel display Refer to chapter Diagnostics and maintenance Additionally a fault code is allocated to each fault name shown in parameters 0401 0412 and 0413 The fieldbus specific fault code is indicated as a hexadecimal value coded according to the DRIVECOM specification Note that not all fieldbuses support the fault code indication The table below defines the faul
43. addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 Protocol specific See manuals Embedded Fieldbus EFB Control SAFE68320658 English and BACnet Protocol 3AUA0000004591 English 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5314 EFB PAR 14 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5315 EFB PAR 15 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5316 EFB PAR 16 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5317 EFB PAR 17 0 65535 See parameter 5310 288 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5318 EFB PAR 18 0 65535 See parameter 5310 5319 EFB PAR 19 EFB PAR 20 0 65535 Reserved 5320 Parameter listing and descriptions 289 290 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 81 PFA CONTROL This group defines a Pump and Fan Alternation PFA mode of operation The major features of PFA are The ACH550 controls the motor of pump 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump 2 and pump 3 etc The ACH550 switches pump 2 and then pump 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary
44. and then back to a unique EFB station ID Protocol selection Description Range 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 5 Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates via a Modbus controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 2 N2 The drive communicates via an N2 controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 3 FLN The drive communicates via an FLN controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 5 BACNET The drive communicates via a BACnet controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL EFB communication parameters Description EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 OXFFFF Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 Defines the communication speed of 38 4 57 6 76 8 kb s the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 134 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication he s
45. correction on page 180 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 19 Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 144 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Digital output signal source selection Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 47 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 35 COMM Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes a binary code in parameter 0134 that energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the table below 0 De energize the relay 1 Energize the relay Par 0134 Binary RO6 ROS RO4 RO3 RO2 ROT 36 COMM 1 Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes a binary code in parameter 0134 that energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the table below e 0 De energize the relay 1 Energize the re
46. is active 8 11 TIMER 1 4 Defines the timer as the control for the PID set selection Timer de activated PID set 1 Timer activated PID set 2 See parameter Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DIT as the control for PID set selection Activating the digital input selects PID set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID set 2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID set selection See DI1 INV above For 2 ZONE selections 12 14 the drive first calculates the difference between PID1 set 1 setpoint and feedback deviation as well as the difference between PID1 set 2 setpoint and feedback deviation 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive will control the zone and select the set PID1 set 1 or PID1 set 2 which has a larger deviation A positive deviation a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a negative deviation This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive will control the zone and select the set PID1 set 1 or PID1 set 2 which has a smaller deviation A negative deviation a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive deviation This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does
47. where applicable The default switching frequency is 4 kHz WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Examples for using the table Checking and conclusions H1 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C2 150 m cable R3 frame size 4 kHz fsw Category C3 300 m cable R5 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C3 150 m cable R6 frame size 4 kHz fsw EMC limits not applicable 150 m cable Technical data Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m cable a du dt filter is needed Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C2 are met with a 150 m cable Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz gt a 300 m cable cannot be used even with a du dt filter A sine filter must be used and the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the installation Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 are met with a 300 m cable Check operational limits for R5 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m cable the basic unit is sufficient Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be met with a 300 m cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation Check operational limits for R6 and 4 kHz gt for a 150 m cable the basic unit is sufficient EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC requirements 00577999 xls A 391 40
48. 0 0 NOISE SMOOTHING 2609 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DC STABILIZER 2619 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE U gt m Q ORO ate Fr iw m m X 9 N pu gt b o E gt U N N e X miN 9 40 A45 gt m SI Ja 5 OE m m gt o v 328 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control rls o 0 n NOT SEL 2209 0 00 s 230 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 250 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 250 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 250 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 250 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 250 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 250 on ov on ow TAE TENTE mm ma E SQUARED 260 Po al 50 o 50 o m m 3 2 g Fi 00 N xD AB Co Po N xD al AB Co ine al Az Co 00 N xD al AB Co NI 9 Parameter listing and descriptions 329 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster defa
49. 01 User s Manual Code Description 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 O LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 Linear See B in the figure md Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 lt A gt A 2202 ACCELERATION TIME B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 s See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 2206 DECELER TIME 2 20 0 1800 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 O LINEAR 0 0 1000 0 s Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 e See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 0 1800 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL e Ramp is linear Parameter listing and descriptions 217 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 7 Defines contr
50. 026 5 932 568 5 940 286 6 175 256 6 265 724 6 370 049 6 597 148 6 856 502 6 956 352 6 984 958 7 034 510 7 067 997 7 109 780 7 221 152 D510 319 D512 696 D548 182 423 10 Contact information ACH550 01 User s Manual See also section Product and service inquiries on page 11 Albania Tirana Tel 355 4 234 368 363 854 Fax 355 4 363 854 Algeria Tel 212 2224 6168 Fax 212 2224 6171 Argentina Valentin Alsina Tel 54 0 114 229 5707 Fax 54 0 114 229 5593 Australia Victoria Notting Hill Tel 1800 222 435 Tel 61 3 8544 0000 email drives au abb com Austria Vienna Tel 43 1 601090 Fax 43 1 60109 8312 Azerbaijan Baku Tel 994 12 598 54 75 Fax 994 12 493 73 56 Bahrain Manama Tel 4973 725 377 Fax 973 725 332 Bangladesh Dhaka Tel 88 02 8856468 Fax 88 02 8850906 Belarus Minsk Tel 375 228 12 40 Tel 375 228 12 42 Fax 375 228 12 43 Belgium Zaventem Tel 32 2 718 6320 Fax 32 2 718 6664 Bolivia La Paz Tel 591 2 278 8181 Fax 4591 2 278 8184 Bosnia Herzegovina Tuzla Tel 887 35 246 020 Fax 4387 35 255 098 Brazil Osasco Tel 0800 014 9111 Tel 455 11 3688 9282 Fax 455 11 3688 9421 Bulgaria Sofia Tel 359 2 981 4533 Fax 359 2 980 0846 424 Canada Montreal Tel 41514 420 3100 Fax 41 514 420 3137 Chile Santiago Tel 56 2 471 4391 Fax 456 2 471 4399 China Beijing Tel 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 486 10 58
51. 05A4 4 06A9 4 08A8 4 012A 4 015A 4 023A 4 031A 4 038A 4 044A 4 045A 4 059A 4 072A 4 087A 4 096A 4 124A 4 125A 4 157A 4 180A 4 195A 4 246A 4 8 8 11 9 19 4 JJS 15 JJS 20 JJS 30 JJS 40 JJS 80 JJS 90 JJS 125 124 125 157 180 JJS 175 JJS 200 JJS 250 JJS 350 00467918 xls B i Example 382 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Fuses 208 240 V drives Input ACH550 01 current jEC269 gG ULclassT Bussmann A A A type 04A6 2 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 66 07A5 2 ie 012A 2 JJS 15 017A 2 JJS 25 024A 2 JJS 30 046A 2 JJS 60 059A 2 JJS 80 143A 2 200 JJS 200 300 50 10 16 25 0 63 221A 2 300 JJS 300 248A 2 JJS 350 00467918 xls B Example Note The use of ultra rapid fuses is recommended but normal HRC fuses ABB Tmax moulded case circuit breakers MCCB or ABB 200 B C miniature circuit breakers MCB are sufficient See section Circuit breakers on page 384 Technical data 383 10 384 ACH550 01 User s Manual Circuit breakers The tables below list ABB circuit breakers that can be used instead of fuses recommended Depending on the type code Tmax moulded case circuit breakers MCCB or S200 B C miniature circuit breakers MCB manual motor starters or both are given ABB S200 B C miniature circuit breakers MCB and manual motor starters Rated ABB miniature circuit breakers current and manual motor starters Prospective short circuit c
52. 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct fan failure obstructions in the air flow dirt or dust coating on the heat sink excessive ambient temperature excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 2011 Not used 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform note 1 an automatic fault reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Diagnostics and maintenance 365 ACH550 01 User s Manual Alarm ES 2014 AUTOCHANGE _ This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function See is active Note 1 To control PFA use Group 81 PFA CONTROL and see also the Pump alternation macro on page 700 2015 PFAILOCK This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start e any motor when Autochange is used e the speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used ELE 7 LM BUTTON This alarm warns that the OFF key has been See pressed on the control panel when the local control
53. 28 32 on the control board of the drive The standard RS485 interface provides the following embedded fieldbus EFB protocols Modbus Metasys N2 APOGEE FLN BACnet For more information refer to manuals Embedded Fieldbus EFB Control 3AFE68320658 English and BACnet Protocol 3AUA0000004591 English or Via a plug in fieldbus adapter EXT FBA module mounted in expansion slot 2 of the drive EXT FBAs must be ordered separately EXT FBAs include LonWorks Ethernet Modbus TCP Ethernet IP PROFIBUS DP CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet For more information refer to the appropriate adapter module documentation Both the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol and the plug in fieldbus adapter EXT FBA module and are activated with parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL The ACH550 panel provides a Serial Communication assistant which helps you in setting up serial communication 130 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows the ACH550 fieldbus control E E B Fieldbus controller Other devices ABB Ss DD FBA Fieldbus adapter option Rxxx lot 2 d EFB Standard serial lA link RS485 Either a plug in fieldbus adapter EG X1 28 32 module or the standard serial RS485 P y interface can be used at a time W
54. 388 sizes Cable See section Control cables on page 32 specifications Technical data 393 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Hardware description X Hardware description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen connected internally to chassis ground 2 Alt Analogue input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used J1 AM OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm SP D X 2 J1 AM ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm T8 J1 AM ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm TEP C Tie internally to 3 AGND Se Tana input circuit common connected the chassis ground through 1 Mohm 10 VY 10V 10 mA reference voltage output for analogue input potentiometer 1 10 kohm accuracy 2 Analogue I O J1 Al2 OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm Se SIT e J1 Al2 ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm SR ee E GE AGND ERI MELIUS input circuit common connected PA to the chassis ground through 1 Mohm ANa eye input channel 2 programmable Default Actual signal 1 PID1 feedback Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used Analogue output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 ohm Accuracy 3 AO2 Analogue output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load 500 ohm Accuracy 3 AGND Analogue output circuit common connected internally to the chassis ground through 1 Mohm 394 Tec
55. 6 THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the connection figures on page 250 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 124A PT100 and PTC 2 AI2 PT100 and PTC DI6 Thermistor and PTC 3503 ALARM LIMIT 10 200 C Defines the alarm limit for 0 5000 ohm the motor temperature measurement 0 1 e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors or PTC connected to digital input 0 De activated 1 Activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT 10 200 C Defines the fault limit for 0 5000 ohm the motor temperature measurement 0 1 At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors or PTC connected to digital input 0 De activated 1 Activated 252 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS This group defines the timed functions The timed functions include four daily starts stops four weekly starts stops overrides four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers TIME PERIOD 1 360
56. 6kb s 9 6 kb s PARITY 5203 Aka AA e OK MESSAGES 5204 PARITY ERRORS 5205 FRAME ERRORS 5206 BUFFER OVERRUNS 5207 53 EFB petens EFE BAUD RATE 5303 9 6 kb s 9 6kibs s 9 6kibs s 9 6kibs s 9 6kibs s 9 6kibs s EFB PARITY 5304 o o o o o o EFB CTRL PROFILE 5305 EFB OK MESSAGES 5306 EFB CRC ERRORS 5307 EFB UART ERRORS 5308 EFB STATUS 5309 EFE NIE E EGER X EFB PAR 5310 10 20 m 346 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control la lalo wo mw 2 NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED 5101 Par index 5102 5126 512 512 512 213 5131 513 513 5201 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 5202 520 520 520 520 520 520 1 530 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 530 Co 530 c QO al oO wo o o o o o IN O uo AB no 00 N O o J oO IN o o N Parameter listing and descriptions 347 81 PFA CONTROL 98 OPTIONS 348 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index REFERENCE STEP 1 8103 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 REFERENCE STEP 2 8104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 REFEREN
57. ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range Drive started START STOP COMMAND Group 10 START STOP DIR START ENABLE SIGNAL parameters 1608 amp 1609 I Relay energized Relay de energized STARTED RELAY STATUS Group 14 RE LAY OUTPUTS Damper open DAMPER STATUS Damper Damp r opening closing time time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS 1 E75 Acceleration Drive coasts time to stop par 2202 202 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range START ENABLE 2 6 7 Selects the source of the Start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the Run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the Start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for Start enable 2 signal e f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the control panel display The drive will not start until the Start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the Start enable 2 signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the Start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of Command Word 2 parameter 0302 a
58. DI1 DI1 DH DH STOP DIR ExT2 DIRECTION 1003 FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD 318 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control Par index E P Jo IHE o oo o o o oso o oa o oa o oo o oa o oso o on o on o ou BET 041 TIMER 1 NOT SEL NOT set 1002 FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD 1003 o 5 wo o O o N o o W m Fo o N a OO A O ro Parameter listing and descriptions 319 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index KEYPAD REF REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 11 REFERENCE SEL 1101 Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm SELECT EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1102 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz REF1 MIN 1104 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm REF1 MAX 1105 p REF2 SELECT 1106 PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT s REF2 MAX 1108 100 096 100 096 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 CONST 12 CONSTANT SPEED SEL 1201 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 SPEEDS CONST SPEED 1 1202 5 6 Hz 5 6 Hz 5 6 Hz 5 6 Hz 5 6 Hz 5 6 Hz CONST SPEED 2 1203 10 12 Hz 10 12 Hz 10 12 Hz 10 12Hz 10 12 Hz 10 12 H
59. EMC filter see pages 42 frame sizes R1 R4 and 43 frame sizes R5 R6 in chapter nstalling the drive WARNING The ACH550 is not a field repairable unit Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning unit contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Centre for replacement WARNING The ACH550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on WARNING The heat sink may reach a high temperature See chapter Technical data Contents of this manual 7 ACH550 01 User s Manual WARNING Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the control panel start and stop keys or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is six in ten minutes Note For more technical information contact your local ABB representative see page 424 Contents of this manual ACH550 01 User s Manual Drive package After opening the package check that the following items are included ACH550 drive 1 IP21 box containing clamps and connection box 2 IP54 box containing top cover box containing control panel operator keypad ACH CP B and panel connector 3 cardboard mounting template 4 user s manual 5 warning stickers The figure below shows the contents of the drive package Contents of this manual ACH550 01
60. EXT TRIM PID Note To restore the default factory settings select the HVAC default application macro Modes The HVAC control panel operator keypad has several different modes for configuring operating and diagnosing the drive The modes are Output Standard display mode Shows drive status information and operates the drive e Parameters mode Edits parameter values individually e Assistants mode Guides the start up and configuration e Changed parameters mode Shows changed parameters Drive parameter backup mode Uploads or downloads the parameters between the drive and the control panel e Time and date mode Sets the time and date for the drive e O settings mode Checks and edits the I O settings Start up and control panel 63 ACH550 01 User s Manual Output Standard display mode Use the Output standard display mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To go to the Output mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive HAND Indicates that the drive control is local i e from the control panel operator keypad AUTO Indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus 2 Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Rotating arrow clockwi
61. EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5 BACNET The drive communicates via a BACnet controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL Parameter listing and descriptions 313 ACH550 01 User s Manual Complete parameter list The following table lists all parameters and their default values for all application macros The user can enter desired parameter values under the User column HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index 99 START UP LANGUAGE 9901 ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH DATA APPLIC HVAC SUPPLY RETURN CLNGTWR CONDENS BOOSTER MACRO 9902 DEFAULT FAN FAN FAN ER PUMP MOTOR CTRL SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR MODE 9904 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ MOTOR NOM 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 VOLT 9905 460V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V MOTOR NOM CURR 10 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 IN 1 0 IN 1 0 IN MOTOR NOM FREQ 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz MOTOR NOM 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 SPEED 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm MOTOR NOM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ID RUN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN 1 OPERATING
62. Fax 446 0 21 14 86 71 Switzerland Z rich Tel 41 0 58 586 0000 Fax 441 0 58 586 0603 Syrian Arab Republic Tel 9626 5620181 ext 502 Fax 49626 5621369 Taiwan Taipei Tel 886 2 2577 6090 Fax 4886 2 2577 9467 Fax 4886 2 2577 9434 Tanzania Dar es Salaam Tel 255 51 2136750 Tel 255 51 2136751 2136752 Fax 4255 51 2136749 Thailand Bangkok Tel 66 0 2665 1000 Fax 66 0 2665 1042 Tunis Tunis Tel 216 71 860 366 Fax 216 71 860 255 Turkey Istanbul Tel 90 216 528 2200 Fax 90 216 365 2944 Uganda Nakasero Kampala Tel 256 41 348 800 Fax 256 41 348 799 Ukraine Kiev Tel 880 44 495 22 11 Fax 380 44 495 22 10 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual The United Arab Emirates Dubai Tel 971 43147500 Tel 971 4 3401777 Fax 971 43401771 3401539 United Kingdom Daresbury Warrington Tel 44 1925 741 111 Fax 44 1925 741 693 Uruguay Montevideo Tel 598 2 707 7300 Tel 598 2 707 7466 USA New Berlin Tel 1 262 785 3200 Fax 1 262 785 0397 Technical data Venezuela Caracas Tel 58 212 2031924 Fax 58 212 237 6270 Vietnam Hochiminh Tel 84 8 8237 972 Fax 84 8 8237 970 Zimbabwe Harare Tel 263 4 369 070 Fax 263 4 369 084 427 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual 428 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Index A ABB feedback on drive manuals eee 11 product and service inquiries s n a nnana 11 DEOGUCLISTUIB
63. INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT1 DIT de activated EXT2 2 6 DIZ INV DIG INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Parameter listing and descriptions 177 ACH550 01 User s Manual 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 All Defines analogue input 1 A11 as the reference source 2 AI2 Defines analogue input 2 AI2 as the reference source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analogue input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analogue input triggers a fault stopping the drive e Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA
64. Loads the saved override set into use as an active parameter set 1706 OVERRIDE DIR 6 7 Selects the source of the override direction signal 0 FORWARD Assigns forward as the override direction 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the override direction signal De activating the digital input selects the forward direction Activating the digital input selects the reverse direction 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override direction signal See DI1 above 7 REVERSE Assigns reverse as the override direction 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override direction signal Activating the digital input selects the forward direction De activating the digital input selects the reverse direction 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override direction signal See DI1 INV above 1707 OVERRIDE REF 1 CONSTANT 2 PID Selects the source of the override reference 1 CONSTANT Selects a preset frequency or speed for the override The frequency value is defined by parameter 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ and the speed value by parameter 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED PROCESS PID SET 1 2 PID The reference is taken from the PID output see group 40 Note The following conditions must be met when using PID in the override mode PID1 set point parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL can be either A1 A2 Or INTERNAL PID1 parameter set 1 m
65. NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel operator keypad are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE The value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to the permanent memory 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 Selects the source of the Start enable 1 signal See the figure on page 202 Note Start enable functionality differs from the Run enable functionality 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the Start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of Command Word 2 parameter 0302 activates the Start disable 1 signal e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 Selects the source of the Start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the Run enable functionality 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the Start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of Command Word 2 parameter 0302 activates the Start disable 2 signal See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 148 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Acceleration deceleration ramp pair selection Code Description Range 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 6 6 Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs with one ramp
66. ROCIO S maa Ban AKALA tian er ese he Be tetas we den Ga hte aa 236 time fault parameter 0 eee 236 standard display mode see output mode El A O 418 start aux order PFA parameter 312 aux motor PFA parameters 292 aux motor delay PFA parameter 294 day parameters ana as Keyes a Pe RPG 255 DC magnetizing time parameter 214 delay PFA parameter cece eee 309 delay alarm code n n nnan uiuere od eR 367 delay parameter n n nannan ccc ees 215 frequency PFA parameters 292 function parameter l l eee 213 inhibit parameter esses 214 parameter Group s its toto pede d e Naa 213 time parameters ellen 255 Index 447 ACH550 01 User s Manual torque boost current parameter 215 start enable missing alarm Codes ee iad saddest RR 366 source select parameters 148 201 start mode auto Mate iode Kh re ce RR c eus 213 automatic torque boost cee eee 213 DC magnetizing saves tess ande ea ee eae aa 213 NING So TT 213 start stop parameter group 0c eee eee 213 start stop dir parameter group l l 173 starting order counter Xa a a ee cia Pee ee 301 cius PT M 60 assistante e co cese UP RE Dac ed dad Baie dedit ure 68 by changing the parameters individually 62 by using the start up assistant 60 start up data par
67. Range LO HI Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of supervised parameter HI 3203 Lo 3202 t Case A Maa HiH n t 0 Case B Energized 1 0 LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of supervised parameter Active limit Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Parameter listing and descriptions 241 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101 159 Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101 159 Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 242 Parameter listing and description
68. Range 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 binary Status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 as par 0401 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 as par 0401 Fault code of the third last fault Read only 172 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 10 START STOP DIR This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use parameter 1102 in the next group Code Description Range 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start D11 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1008 1 FORWARD 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start D11 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse DI2 de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary p
69. Return fan 92 This application macro is for return fan applications where the return fan takes air out of the room according to the signals received from the transducer See the figure below When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended AKV V Copyright 2007 ABB Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Return fan Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 1 SCR an S AH L HAH EE AGND Analogue input circuit common SE 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al a RE Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit common LL posue mu AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pz GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Star
70. Timer selects between two Process PID sets 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE Timer enables the autochange in PFA operation Real time clock and timed functions 119 1 Enabling the timer ACH550 01 User s Manual The timer can be enabled from one of the digital inputs or inverted digital inputs To enable the timer follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys Then press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Scroll to group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS with the UP ik keys and press EL Scroll to TIMERS ENABLE with the UP DOWN keys and press EDIT The current value is displayed Use the UP DOWN keys to change the value After selecting the new value press SAVE to save the value The new value is displayed below the TIMERS ENABLE text Press EXIT twice to return to the main menu Real time clock and timed functions ACH550 01 User s Manual Note Start and Run enable can be assigned to the same digital input 2 Setting the time period The example shows how to set a start time In addition the stop time and the start and stop days have to be set in the same manner These constitute a time period Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys Then press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Scroll to group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Scroll to START TIME 1 with the UP DOWN keys and pre
71. Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Parameter 4005 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Wake up level can be above or below setpoint See the figure C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up P 4025 j Setpoint P 4025 WAKE UP DELAY 0 60 s Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEV for at least this time period restarts the PID controller e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 278 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 11 Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters PID set 1 and PID set 2 PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected PID set 1 uses parameters 4001 4026 PID set 2 uses parameters 4101 4126 0 SET 1 PID set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID set selection Activating the digital input selects PID set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID set selection e See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID set 2 parameters 4101 4126
72. be done because PFA interlocks cannot be observed in the override mode Parameter values are inconsistent All override mode parameters do not have correct values when override mode is enabled parameter 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE Check for any of the following parameter 1701 OVERRIDE SEL override activation signal parameter 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ and 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED both zero Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action 1012 PAR PFA IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized for PFA Or a conflict exists between group 14 parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFA IO 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFA motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFA motors in group 14 and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFA motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ 1016 PAR USER LOAD Parameter values for the user load curve are C inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met e 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 lt 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 lt 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3 05 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3
73. below shows the mounting of the fieldbus module 138 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module Note Install the input power and motor cables first Setting up communication through a plug in fieldbus adapter EXT FBA module Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the fieldbus adapter EXT FBA module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in this manual and the fieldbus adapter module manual The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is then activated by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to EXT FBA After the communication is initialized the configuration parameters of the module become available in parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE in the drive Setting up FBA with the Serial Communication assistant is shown below The related parameters are described starting from page 140 Setting up FBA with the Serial Communication assistant To set up FBA follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to Serial Communication and press SEL Serial communications 139 ACH550 01 User s Manual 4 Select EXT FBA with the UP DOWN keys and press SAVE 5 The assistant recognizes the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module
74. by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 Free data location that can be written from the serial link Used for relay output control e See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32 67 Free data location that can be written from the serial link 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 Free data location that can be written from the serial link PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 84 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME 0 00 499 99 kh Drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh Cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 9999 MWh Drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Cannot be reset 0142 IREVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 Mrev Motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when in the Parameters mode Parameter listing and descriptions 165 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days Drive s accumulated power on time in days Cannot be reset 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 00 00 00 23 59 58 Drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds s Shown in format hh mm ss e Cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP 10 200 C 0 5000 ohm Mot
75. can select another assistant from the menu or exit the Assistants mode The table below lists the tasks of the assistants The order of tasks presented by the Start up assistant depends on your entries The following task list is typical opin the motor Prompts for the control panel display language selection Prompts for motor data Guides user through the rotation check Commission drive Prompts for motor data Application Prompts for the application macro selection References 18 2 Prompts for the source of speed references 1 and 2 Prompts for reference limits Prompts for frequency or speed limits Start Stop Control Prompts for the source of the start and stop commands Prompts for the start and stop mode definition Prompts for acceleration and deceleration times Protections Prompts for current and torque limits Prompts for the use of Run enable and Start enable signals Prompts for the use of the emergency stop Prompts for the Fault function selection Prompts for the Auto reset functions selection 70 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual Constant Speeds Prompts for the use of constant speeds Prompts for constant speed values PID control Prompts for PID settings Prompts for the source of the process reference Prompts for reference limits Prompts for the source limits and units of the process actual value Defines the use of Sleep function PID Flow Prompts for the use
76. common LL posue mu AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pz GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 a OE Ed DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 2 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 176 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 10 a Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Setpoint selection Set 1 Set 2 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 109 ACH550 01 User s Manual 12 Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 110 This application macro can be used for appl
77. descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Code Description Range 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 47 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 0 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize the relay when the drive is ready to function Requires Run enable signal is present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize the relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize the relay when power is applied De energize when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize the relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize the relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize the relay when the motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize the relay when the drive receives a start command even if Run enable signal is not present De energize the relay when the drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize the relay when the first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 SUPERVISION 9 SUPRV1 UNDER Energize the relay when the first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 SUPERVISION 10 SUPRV2 OVER Energize the relay when the second supervised parameter 3204 exc
78. descriptions 273 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 7 Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1 All Uses analogue input 1 for ACT1 2 Al2 Uses analogue input 2 for ACT1 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 5 POWER Uses power for ACT1 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1 Ali Uses analogue input 1 for ACT2 2 Al2 Uses analogue input 2 for ACT2 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 5 POWER Uses power for ACT2 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 274 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done Par4016 Source Source min Source max Analogue input 1 1301 MINIMUM AIT 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Analogue input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXI
79. e See RO 1 ON DELAY e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Parameter listing and descriptions 193 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS This group defines the drive s analogue current signal outputs The drive s analogue outputs can be e any parameter of Group 01 OPERATING DATA limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining a maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output filtered Code Description Range 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 159 Defines the content for analogue output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 101 159 Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA Parameter defined by value e g value 102 parameter 0102 194 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual
80. eee 209 measurement fault code 356 D DC brake time parameter a 214 bus voltage data parameter 162 current braking selection parameter 214 current ref parameter ees 214 magnetizing time parameter 214 overvoltage fault code naaa 354 stabilizer parameter net kk a aha eae ed 229 undervoltage fault code 354 deceleration at aux start PFA parameter 311 emergency time parameter 217 parameter group cicer a ha RR a 216 ramp select parameter 149 216 ramp shape parameter cece eee 217 ramp time PFA parameter 311 ramp zero select parameter 149 218 time parameter courtes d scenes eer E dub Era E E e 216 default factory settings 0000 es 63 degree of protection IP code 22 A oe RR NG hs 379 380 derivation time PID parameter nanona anaana 269 derivation time parameter 0 000 e eee eee 221 device overtemperature Index 433 ACH550 01 User s Manual alarmi Code a ins le 365 o sci eo cent ag nine AG eee wes sls 354 ejes Mem DM EET 351 olei cq ede AA 352 digital input at fault history parameters 171 Connections rH ae wee beet awe 394 specifications suas Plas hate ee ET screen e 395 status data parameter
81. esetere aro Ea e erdt entre PC 351 eii EPI ee ey abe Vane ded Bese Ree ae eet 374 Capacitors sober el Mungo PA 373 CA Ket ca dean eun Da Guar ese eM NA aaa a Beas Scene uc 369 internal enclosure fan l l eee eee 372 iic e RET 368 matane e a SUNG adeat eto eat a ia 369 triggers parameter group sssaaa aaaea aa 230 manual compatibility with control panel operator keypad 59 with drive firmware llle 5 manual motor state ae rep gioco Bieta aed ts 384 manuals NO esie tis kam hak E Sb pape eas Rn Sain de ee E 2 providing feedback ada pea pete ses ke CERES SE 11 mata Sia AGNO NA DA ees Bate ea Bde 417 maximum frequency parameter a 211 torque limit parameters 00 ee eee 212 torque select parameter eee eee 212 MCB miniature circuit breaker 383 384 MCCB moulded case circuit breaker 383 384 385 minimum frequency parameter a 210 torque limit parameters llle 212 torque select parameter nnna nnana aa 211 mode control panel operation 63 E A a eek ee Ren AA AA 68 changed parameters eee ee eeee 72 drive parameter backup cease 73 faul logge s aser stub Euer REN a E ERU EHE 83 YO SOUING Sisk Bat PTT 82 output standard display o o ooo 64 PAra Mete ia tes NAT pev eX hi ERE 66 De ANG dale e emere ids e dede Bread 79 mode drive control location AUTOA seh ta hah dni sta tr
82. for acceleration and one ramp for deceleration 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for ramp pair selection The command word is supplied through fieldbus communication 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 7 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to O 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O The command word is supplied through fieldbus communication Communication fault functions Code Description COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 IO COMM and sets the speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 lo COMM and sets the speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 60 0 s Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults
83. in booster stations in buildings The pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the pump according to the signal received from the pressure transducer and adding auxiliary pumps directly on line when needed By default this macro can use one auxiliary pump To use more auxiliary pumps refer to parameter Group 81 PFA CONTROL See the figure below When process PI D is used in the AUTO mode the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel operator keypad but it can also be given through the analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended Copyright 2007 ABB 100 Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Pump alternation 1 SCR n Al External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA EE AGND Analogue input circuit common ME 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AP Signal cable shield screen 1 10 kohm Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA E E Analogue input circuit common L m AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC GND Common for DI return signals lr Digital input common for all DM
84. is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with the parameter setting 2 31 PFA the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA and so on The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Parameter listing and descriptions 295 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description PFA with Autochange mode The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFA or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter setting ACH550 relay assignment Autochange disabled One additional relay output for the PFA that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating 296 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFA or X anything and where the Autochange function is e
85. macro 222005 88 KO settings moda ies a a 82 id run Sla code sa dre et te er eee ee eds NI 366 fall aU COD Gis cana de aab 2o eh de Sov e uo bike de Med 355 parameter i cuadra um aor e dedo Euer iptum ard ete am 160 identification oii SAU PT Tte 14 MOOO aee PET 19 incompatible sw fault Code aaa 358 information parameter group aa 243 input kWh data parameter eee eee 166 MWh data parameter eee eee 166 input phase loss alarm code nananana 367 install paa opua al ee ole CC ee wn 37 AA 53 preparing Ocio Sos n Maer Matai an eer uci mods 13 checkliste 2 sss ee t detiene we SE io G 36 see also mounting integration time PID parameter nnn aa anaana 268 integration time parameter a 220 interlock TETIGUODE sad odo otro edet ued d ers 290 interlocks parameter nananana naau 302 internal setpoint PID parameter 272 internal timer application macro sasaaa ene 102 internal timer with constant speeds application macro 104 IO communication alarm code 364 seals oa tua AA AA Do see A 22 IR compensation 438 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual frequency parameter 1 2 2 0 0 ees 227 par meteiS n n Be Sire Aa bad aT oe og R RR ean ag 227 voltage parameter n nnana ces 227 IT system warning about EMC filters 7 K keypad reference select parameter
86. maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference 0 600 for torque Sets the maximum for external reference 2 1108 REF2 MAX 0 100 The maximum analogue input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analogue input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS This group defines a set of constant speeds In general You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive no negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFA Pump and Fan Alternation is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code Description Range 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 14 Defines the digital inputs used to select constant speeds See general comments in the introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects cons
87. not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint Parameter listing and descriptions 279 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 This group defines a second set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Description Range 4101 Ses 4001 4026 4126 280 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 42 EXT TRIM PID This group defines the parameters used for the External PID controller PID2 of the ACH550 The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID controller PID1 set 1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description Range 4201 See 4001 4021 4221 228 ACTIVATE 6 12 Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input di
88. o ao ee a0 o a0 144 s0 s00 so Parameter listing and descriptions 263 264 ACH550 01 User s Manual Overview of PID controllers PID controller Basic set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error deviation value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a fan or pump needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACH550 only parameter Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 is needed A schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 is presented on page 265 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual o P1101 247 Panel REF1 REF1 Panel REF2 PID Setpoint 00 40 Al P4016 Panel REF Current 500 PID1 Torque Hand Auto ans P4014 PID Act value a P4015 HAND PAD AUTO Current Torque Power P1104 Const A Speed P1105 Comm REF 1 Panel REF 2 p7106 DI ale onst Al Speed Comm REF 2 Panel REF2 P4010 Al P4012 J PID Setpoint G40 Al2 P401 PID1 Out Comm PID1 Internal PID Act Value Al P4016 Current P4015 Torque P4014 Power Al P401 Current Torque Power Note In order to activate and use the PID controller parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT must be set to value 19 PID10OUT Parameter
89. ob tn 389 Control celle les s eos oer id et exero rco eir 393 ENCINA mt 397 CODING NE AA RI DEL UE 397 Dimensions and weights sese 399 Ambient conditions sss sss eee eee eee 416 MALS IANS icin least ceva tica 417 Applicable standarde sse sees 418 Emang ER 418 CTC MAMI 419 e les AA 419 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 420 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 420 Equipment warranty and liability 422 Product protection in the USA 423 Contact information 424 INOOX Cru 429 Table of contents ACH550 01 User s Manual Contents of this manual What this chapter contains This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive the motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit This chapter also contains an introduction to the contents of this manual At the end of the chapter you find instructions on how to make inquiries about products and service find information on product training and give feedback on the drive manuals Compatibility This manual covers ACH550 01 drives For ACH550 UH drive data and instructions please refer to ACH550 UH HVAC Drives User s Manual 3AUA0000004092 English The manual is compatible with the ACH550
90. operation The second auxiliary motor starts if one auxiliary motor is running ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 292 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 Hz Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if e two auxiliary motors are running ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 Hz Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if the first auxiliary motor is running f Hz alone ACH550 output MAX frequency drops below the limit P 8109 8112 1 output frequency P8112 stays below the P 8112 1 relaxed limit MIN 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D After the first auxiliary motor stops Output frequency increases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B
91. ps m o c m Zz QO ev o n 3017 ENABLE 0 ENABLE ENABLE NOT set NOT SEL 0 0 COMM FAULT FUNC COMM FAULT TIME Al FAULT LIMIT Al2 FAULT LIMIT WIRING 3 o 00 0 Yo 0 i 0 m 00 ENABLE ENABLE AO E AA SE CB TEMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 l mon m gt u gt gt ES 3 24m 34 3 gt E EER 23239 o o N IN J po wo wo 330 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control le e e alala oo mwn 00 mun m me NOT SEL NOT SEL FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL FAULT FAULT NOT SEL NOT SEL ms ms mos moe mos ms ao 2 NOT SEL NOT SEL ow 3021 0 302 2901 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 00 3001 3002 300 Co 300 A 300 300 300 300 301 o 3011 301 301 N 301 00 0 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE M 3023 302 5 ag R o NO o jo a joa o a o o ja la on Parameter listing and descriptions 331 32 SUPER VISION 33 INFOR MATION 332 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index TRIAL TIME 3102 DELAY TIME 3103 AR OVER CURRENT 3104 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
92. recommended corrective action 2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient over voltages in the input power supply insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 undersized brake chopper if present 3 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct fan failure obstructions in the air flow dirt or dust coating on the heat sink excessive ambient temperature excessive motor load 4 SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct e a short circuit in the motor cable s or motor supply disturbances DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct missing phase in the input power supply blown fuse undervoltage in mains 7 All LOSS Analogue input 1 loss Analogue input value is less than Al FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct source and connection for analogue input e parameter settings for Alt FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 354 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action Al2 LOSS Analogue input 2 loss Analogue input value is less than Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct source and connection for analogue input parameter setting
93. reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended Copyright 2007 ABB Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Cooling tower fan 1 SCR wur an AGND Analogue input circuit common ASF EGG ans E EJE E 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al ro ae Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit common LL posue mu AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pa GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 mom E E 17 DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 3 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are act
94. reset Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NO Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Analogue input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B JC value 50 of reference value B value C B X C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and Al1 for values 14 17 B Correcting reference All for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where 022595 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis REF1 MIN 0 500 Hz 0 30000 rpm Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analogue input signal as a percentage of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz rpm Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analogue input signal These parameters reference and analogue min and max settings provide
95. s Manual Input power mains cable fuses and circuit breakers A four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth is recommended for the input power cabling Shielding is not necessary Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with the input current Always pay attention to local codes when sizing the cables and fuses The input power connectors are at the bottom of the drive Input power cable routing must be done so that the distance from the sides of the drive is at least 20 cm 8 in to avoid excessive radiation to the input power cable In the case of shielded cable twist the cable screen wires together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connect to the PE terminal of the drive or PE terminal of input filter if present Line current harmonics Standard ACH550 drive without any additional options meets IEC EN 61000 3 12 limits for harmonic currents The standard can be met with a transformer short circuit ratio of 120 or higher The harmonic levels under rated load conditions are available on request Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user sized in accordance with the NEC and local codes Recommendations for fuses for short circuit protection on the mains cable are in the following tables Technical data 381 40 ACH550 01 User s Manual Fuses 380 480 V drives Input ACH550 01 current ara gG UL us T Bussmann A type 02A4 4 JJS 10 03A3 4 04A1 4
96. scale and offset adjustment for the reference 180 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual 1105 REF1 MAX 0 500 Hz 0 30000 rpm Sets the maximum for external reference 1 he maximum analogue input signal as a percentage of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm s Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analogue input signal Ext ref Analogue input signal P 1301 or P 1302 or P 1304 P 1305 Ext ref Analogue P 1301 or P 1302 or input signal P 1304 P 1305 Parameter listing and descriptions 181 1106 182 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description REF2 SELECT 0 17 19 21 Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 20 21 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID1 REF2 LIMIT E If PFA is used SELECT MAX 1107 1108 a PFA MIN 1107 1108 0 600 for torque Sets the minimum for external reference 2 1107 REF2 MIN 0 100 nominal torque The minimum analogue input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analogue input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the
97. sois te eoe odes c o ud e mode 130 RS485 network termination n anaoa aeaaaee 132 serial communication assistant 133 setting up communication 0c eee 132 station id parameter 000 e ee eee 134 287 status parameter 0 eee ees 135 288 UART errors count parameter 135 288 cuis m A E T A UNE 397 ELV Extra Low Voltage 2S esee E RE ET ERES 47 52 embedded fieldbus see EFB EMC considerations a c a fh 6s curls qi aa S dust Suri do de Rede Ss 26 filter screws frame sizes R1 R4 42 screws frame sizes R5 R6 43 warning for corner grounded TN systems 7 warning for IT Systems s anaana aaa 7 limits for motor cable length 391 product standard IEC EN 61800 3 compliance 420 emergency deceleration time parameter 217 stop select parameter nonan eee eee 215 stop alarm code rsen EE WANG 366 enclosure IP code eoa S t at 22 Index 435 ACH550 01 User s Manual ENVIAMOS a ARR a aces 22 error value inversion PID parameter 269 external commands selection parameters 143 173 control selection parameter 144 177 fault automatic reset parameter 239 TAU CodeS oasis E pesada ata ta state pullo Gua ded 2 356 Paramele Sumo sus BA phrase ki iesus eot due me A 233 power supply Sce
98. speed range PN typical motor power The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors 1 minute 9 minutes 1 minute Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current 3 8 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual 400 V drives 400 V drives IP21 and IP54 can deliver following currents continuously 24 hours a day 7 days a week and 365 days a year in different ambient temperatures These currents are available up to 1000 m 3300 ft Type code NO al 0 75 al AR N 05A4 4 06A9 4 KNEE aj w N O co NI C1 0 O al E o o a A o M 00 B O gt NO do 7 5 7 ES O B amp B OJN al N i Wa e LENIN LN me LN al al S n2 Co 29 Oo n Gn D Qni Y NI oo gt NO Oo 2 Gn 50 5956 m er i D N O a m Ol A k GO l o i O N O 00 NO e al co al k mb GO l Q gt Qn l N 00 AK Co O N Lu 195A 4 246A 4 P40 Typical motor power at 40 C legs Drive output current at xx C M2000 ABB M2 motor nominal current Catalogue BU General purpose motors EN 12 200
99. ter kaa cloak academe dos ein eR A E a 396 reference data parameter 162 F fan internal enclosure replacement 372 main replacement 369 replacement intervalS oo oo ooooooooo 368 fault COCOS Ani ante hee ea eee a ade oe hk tete am 353 e ce du dcus ae Red pL ae e A wat e ina sien 353 current at history parameter 171 digital input status at history parameter 171 frequency at history parameter 171 functions parameter group s a s asasan areare 232 RISO ees aeneis otn trout MR E a Ta iar 363 history parameter group 20000 ee eee eee 171 INQICAO sities a eng AA 352 last history parameter 0 0000 eee e eee 171 logger modes auae oae ed tae tea e cineri edd t qs 83 previous history parameter 172 reset select parameter 147 198 KA eia aco dog ede cus aca chee le Nada dedo eod 362 speed at history parameter 171 status at history parameter 171 time of history parameters 171 torque at history parameter 171 voltage at history parameter 171 words data parameters naasna ooo 169 fault display fault DB MOS x2 nns Say A b OR e e hs a 353 FBA fieldbus adapter 130 137 communication parameters lilius 140 config file CPI firmw
100. the PID controller PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 Units P4006 Scale P4007 1000 0 P 4009 P4008 Internal scale 100 1000 0 the actual values of the PID controller Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4009 100 VALUE unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to 270 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 20 Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 All Analogue input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analogue input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 272 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 272 11 DIJU 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DIS increases the speed the U stands for up e DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down e Parame
101. the Run enable signal See the figure on page 202 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the Run enable signal Bit 6 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the Run disable signal e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Note Hardware is bypassed if a command is the source of the Run enable signal 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The bit 4 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive Serial communications 147 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range LOCAL LOCK 6 8 Defines control for the use of the HAND mode The HAND mode allows drive control from the control panel operator keypad When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to HAND mode 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for setting the local lock e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication 1607 PARAM SAVE O DONE 1 SAVE Saves all altered parameters to the permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to the permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2
102. the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual E bypass Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 1 SCR an S AH HAH EE AGND Analogue input circuit common SE 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 0r Mares Analogue input circuit common ii AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 2 p DAA E Output current 0 4 20 mA U E AGND Analogue output circuit common 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC GND Common for DI return signals Ei Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 15 DI3 16 DI4 17 DI5 Not used 118 DIE Not used Disable enable with parameter 1601 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Run enable De
103. the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pigtail Keep the pigtail short to minimize noise radiation Also strip the individual wires 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove sheathing at the cable clamp 4 Route the input power and motor cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps 5 Connect the input power motor and the grounding wires to the drive terminals using the torques given in the table on page 46 Frame size R6 See the figures about correct lug types on page 46 Installing the drive 45 ACH550 01 User s Manual Tightening torques UT VI W1 U2 V2 EarthingPE Nm 1 torque Tightening torque 1 8 Frame size R6 lugs R6 Crimp on ring lugs 16 70 mm 6 2 0 AWG cables Remove the screw on terminal lugs Attach crimp on ring lugs to the cables Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing Attach the ring lugs to the remaining bolts with M10 nuts R6 Screw on terminal lugs 95 185 mm 3 0 350 AWG cables a Attach the screw on lugs to the cables b Attach the screw on lugs to the drive 5 WARNING If the wire size is less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG a A crimp on ring lug must be used A cable of wire size less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG connected to a screw on terminal lug will loosen and may damage the drive Note Check the cable lengths accord
104. the timer acts as the source of start stop commands A parameter can only be connected to one timer To connect the parameter follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys Then press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Scroll to group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS and press SEL Scroll to parameter 1201 CONSTANT SPEED SEL and press EDIT Real time clock and timed functions 123 124 ACH550 01 User s Manual Select the created timer with the UP DOWN keys and press SAVE The new value is displayed under CONST SPEED SEL Press EXIT to return to the main menu Real time clock and timed functions ACH550 01 User s Manual Example of timer use The following example shows how a timer is used and connected to different parameters The example uses the same settings as application macro 9 Internal timer with constant speeds In this example the timer will be set to function every weekday from 6 AM to 8 AM and 4 PM to 6 PM On weekends the timer is activated between 10 AM and 12 AM and 8 PM and 10 PM 22 00 Time period 4 20 00 18 00 Time period 2 16 00 12 00 Time p riod 3 10 00 08 00 Time period 1 06 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 Goto parameter Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS and enable the timer The timer can be enabled directly or through any free digital input 2 Goto parameters 3602 3605 and set the start time to 6 AM and stop t
105. used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Technical data 421 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Equipment warranty and liability The manufacturer warrants the equipment supplied against defects in design materials and workmanship for a maximum period of thirty 30 months from the date of manufacturing The local ABB office or distributor may grant a warranty period different to the above and refer to local terms of liability as defined in the supply contract The manufacturer is not responsible for any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alternation or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation units subjected to misuse negligence or accident units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties This is the sole and exclusive warr
106. value for a constant speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 EXT CS1 2 3 2 CS1 2 3 4 Defines timer activated constant speed mode Timer can be used to change between the external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 and 4 1 EXT CS1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timer is active selects constant speed 1 when only timer 1 is active selects constant speed 2 when only timer 2 is active and selects constant speed 3 when both timers 1 and 2 are active 0 0 External reference Timen TiMERZ Function 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 o 1 onsiant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 CS1 2 3 4 Selects constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects constant speed 2 when only timer 1 is active selects constant speed 3 when only timer 2 is active selects constant speed 4 when both timers are active mwesI WwER2Funcon 0 0 Constant speed i 1202 1 9 jConstantspeed2 1203 o 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 186 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS This group defines the limits and the filtering for analogue inputs Code Description Range 1301 MINIMUM Al 0 100 Defines the minimum value of the analogue input Define value as a percentage of the full analogue signal range
107. 0 600 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in the figure below e 4 Underload curve types 60 40 20 0 Ea H IN 2 4 JN The parameter characteristics were as described below e Ifthe load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME obsolete the underload protection is activated Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor rated frequency set by parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ e Tu nominal torque of the motor e fn nominal frequency of the motor Parameter listing and descriptions 261 ACH550 01 User s Manual If you want to emulate the behaviour of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the tables Underload Obsolete parameters supervision with parameters 3013 3015 obsolete LL KI De a an aa an Jo an pee Jana a an 57 a s o 78 7 oe 28 120 20 0 00 s s 20 o oe 0 120 s0 s0 oo efesofomasyon com 262 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual US 60 Hz EN 5 e eL E 10 38 17 50 23 30 1 96 2 e 20 ar 00 s0 00 eo 80 500 s0 oe o 7 x a7 00 70 s00 70 Kao o oe a7 07 25 100 00 s00 oo Ke
108. 00 1500 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm ENASUE ENSE EISE S ENABEE Se ENABLE e TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME 52 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 62 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 210 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1707 2001 200 200 200 o 200 200 2013 2014 201 al 201 201 N 201 2101 2102 210 A 210 210 o 211 o 211 O O Z a gt Z Q O Zz E gt Z m Parameter listing and descriptions 327 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan towerfan Condenser pump Parameter Par nam
109. 01 drive firmware version 3 11d or later See parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 243 Intended use The ACH550 and the instructions in this manual are intended for use in HVAC applications The macros should only be applied to the applications defined in the respective section Intended audience This manual is intended for personnel who install commission operate and service the drive Read the manual before working on the drive The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols Contents of this manual 5 ACH550 01 User s Manual Use of warnings and notes There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual e Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury and death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject The warning symbols are used as follows AX Danger electricity warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment A General danger warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment Safety instructions WARNING The ACH550 should ONLY be installed by a qualified technician WARNING Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circ
110. 0S M 65 Za S1 No 3492820 LJ 20964 1 2001 Ins cl F IP 55 V Hz kW r min A cos Duty 690 Y 50 55 1479 58 0 83 400 D 50 55 1479 101 0 83 660 Y 50 55 1475 60 0 85 380 D 50 55 1475 104 0 85 415 D 50 55 1480 99 0 82 440 D 60 63 1775 103 0 85 Prod code 3GJP252210 ADG138148 LCIE 00 ATEX 6030 6315 C3 d T 6313 C3 450 kg Ex ZU A BB IEC 60034 1 Collect the following information voltage e nominal motor current nominal frequency nominal speed nominal power Preparing for installation 19 ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows a motor with star and delta connections For the highlighted row of the example motor rating plate on page 79 the connection is delta L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Note Check which connection is correct for your motor type 20 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Motor compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current type dependent type code label on drive entry for Output hy current or type code on drive and rating table in Ratings in chapter Technical data Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz B1 Voltage range Motor requirement 208 240 V and supply voltage 380 480 V are both 3 phase voltage and are within the ACH550 voltage range Preparing for installation 21
111. 1 UL Type 1 Dimensions for each frame size na m m e no Cin mm in mm i mm R am Y afee fefee wo 60 20 94 88 14 H1 GE re fro IE KSE g co 00 o wm to co 00 o CERE jmo ss mo ss sa ars 188 se ons 599252 75 255 s uz 5 025 os ozs os 025 90 oss o 04 130 08 isa os reo oss ren oss s uz so us so os ss os ss os s 02 ss uas 05 025 65 025 90 oss Centre to centre dimension C Co N gl A Co a on a on e o Gl Gl Ol O MI P BI M k e o oy al o a O1 al o a 400 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Weights and mounting screws Mounting Mounting screws Metric Imperial units units 24 26 53 57 34 42 75 93 69 86 152 190 1 ACH550 01 246A 4 IP21 71 kg 156 lb ACH550 01 246A 4 IP54 88 kg 194 Ib we we Technical data 401 10 402 ACH550 01 User s Manual Control panel operator keypad dimensions and mounting The control panel overall dimensions are shown in the table below Trim in Dew z 08 IP54 panel mounting kit Use the panel mounting kit option to mount the panel on a cabinet door to maintain the IP54 degree of protection The kit includes a 3 meter extension cable gasket mounting template and mounting screws The figure below shows how to mount the control panel with the gasket
112. 1 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal point e See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 3404 Value Display Ext ae 32768 32767 Signed 0 65535 Unsigned 3B ar meter displayed Direct value Decimal point location and units of measure are identical to the source signal Note Parameters 3402 3403 and 3405 3407 are not effective 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0 127 Selects the units used for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 0 2 NO UNIT 9 C 182 MWh 27 ft 36 I s 45 Pa 54 lb m 63 Mrev lbft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 l min 46 GPS 55 lbh 64 d 112mA 20 m h 29 inHg 38 l h 47 2gals 56 FPS 65 inWC 122mV 212dm s 30 FPM 39 m s 48 gal m 57 ft s 66 m min 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 m3 m 49 galh 58 inH20 67 Nm 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 in wg 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ftwg 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kgh 52 ft hh 61 lbsi 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 lbs 62 ms The following units are useful for the bar display 117 ref 118 act 119 dev 120 LD 121 SP 122 FBK 123 lout 124 Vout 125 Fout 126 Tout 127 Vdc 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 246 Param
113. 2 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time e See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day e See parameter 3605 3622 BOOST SEL m Selects the source for the boost signal 0 NOT SEL Boost signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines DI1 as the boost signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the boost signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the boost signal 2 6 Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the boost signal 256 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description BOOST TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 Defines the boost ON time Time is started when BOOST SEL signal is released If parameter value is 01 30 00 boost is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Boost active Ca Activation DI lt Boost time TIMER 1 SRC 0 31 Collects all wanted timers to a timed f
114. 2 P3 B Time Periods 1 2 and 3 and Boost selected in the timer 24 P4 B Time Period 4 and Boost selected in the timer 25 P1 P4 B Time Periods 1 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 26 P2 P4 B Time Periods 2 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 27 P1 P2 P4 B Time Periods 1 2 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 28 P3 P4 B Time Periods 3 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 29 P1 P3 P4 B Time Periods 1 3 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 30 P2 P3 P4 B Time Periods 2 3 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 31 P14 24 3 4 B Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 and Boost selected in the timer 3627 TIMER 2 SRC See parameter 3626 3628 TIMER 3 SRC See parameter 3626 3629 TIMER 4 SRC See parameter 3626 258 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve is defined by five points 3701 USER LOAD C MODE Supervision mode for the user adjustable load curves This functionality replaces the former underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS To emulate it see section Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision on page 261 0 NOT SEL Supervision is not active 1 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque ex
115. 2 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 TIME PERIOD 2 3606 START TIME 2 TIMER 1 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 3609 STOP DAY 2 TIMER 2 TIME PERIOD 3 SN 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 v TIMER3 3612 START DAY 3 SCIAS 3628 TIMER 3 SRC TIME PERIOD 4 TIMER 4 3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMER 4 SRC 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 BOOSTER 3622 BOOST SEL 3623 BOOST TIME Activates boost DI1 DI6 DI1 INV DI6 INV Parameter listing and descriptions 253 ACH550 01 User s Manual A parameter can be connected to only one timer 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS TIMER 1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL SPAO TIMER SAL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 TIMER 2 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE Description Range 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal The digital input must be activated for timed functions enable 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ACTIVE Timed functions are enabled 1 2 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal This digital input mus
116. 21 7618 Colombia Bogot Tel 57 1 417 8000 Fax 457 1 413 4086 Costa Rica San Jose Tel 506 288 5484 Fax 4506 288 5482 Croatia Zagreb Tel 385 1 600 8550 Fax 4385 1 619 5111 Czech Republic Prague Tel 420 234 322 327 e mail motors amp drives cz abb com Denmark Skovlunde Tel 45 44 504 345 Fax 445 44 504 365 Dominican Republic Santo Domingo Tel 809 561 9010 Fax 4809 562 9011 Ecuador Quito Tel 593 2 2500 645 Fax 4593 2 2500 650 Egypt Cairo Tel 202 6251630 e mail drives eg abb com EI Salvador San Salvador Tel 503 2264 5471 Fax 503 2264 2497 Estonia Tallinn Tel 372 6801 800 email info ee abb com Ethiopia Addis Abeba Tel 251 1 669506 669507 Fax 251 1669511 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Finland Helsinki Tel 358 10 22 11 Tel 358 10 222 1999 Fax 4358 10 222 2913 France Montluel Tel 33 0 4 37 40 40 00 Fax 33 0 4 37 40 40 72 Germany Ladenburg Tel 49 0 1805 222 580 Service Tel 49 0 6203 717 717 Fax 449 0 6203 717 600 Greece Athens Tel 30 210 289 1 651 Fax 430 210 289 1 792 Guatemala Guatemala City Tel 502 363 3814 Fax 4502 363 3624 Hungary Budapest Tel 36 1 443 2224 Fax 436 1 443 2144 India Bangalore Tel 91 80 2294 9585 Fax 91 80 2294 9389 Indonesia Jakarta Tel 6221 2551 5555 email automation id abb com Iran Tehran Tel 98 21 2222 5120 Fax 498 21 2222 5157 Ir
117. 34 PANEL DISPLAY Defines the content for control panel display Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Defines motor overheating detection and reporting Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Defines timed functions Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE Defines user adjustable load curves Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Defines a process PID control operation mode for the drive Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Defines a process PID control operation mode for the drive Group 42 EXT TRIM PID Defines parameters for External PID Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Defines set up variables for external fieldbus communication module FBA Group 52 PANEL COMM Defines set up variables for panel communication Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL Defines set up variables for embedded fieldbus communication protocol Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual e Group 81 PFA CONTROL Defines pump and fan alternation mode of operation Group 98 OPTIONS Configures options for drive Parameter listing and descriptions 157 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 99 START UP DATA This group defines special start up data required to setup the drive enter motor information Description Range 9901 LANGUAGE 0 16 Selects the display language 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRANCAIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 T RKGE 14 2 CZECH 15 MAGYAR
118. 35 breakers CINCUING ecco eos xe aig a teen Ga en eS 384 buffer overruns count parameter 286 bus termitiatlonis ss iuo second nse Rees anan 397 C cable terminals couette oS tdt dotes dU pue eet 388 cable control panel operator keypad 34 cables CONTON ie aca duo Toa ANG a ada 32 47 51 input power mains n a anona 44 48 381 386 MOLON sss vc wie UO R tun e reo eurn 28 44 48 390 cabling instructions pu eh EXER EP ERATIS 28 capacitors maintenance intervalS o oooooooooo 368 reforming ao Cate cra tese M remite e tuse id 373 replacement ic aves sa e ELI Rud a 373 category Oum Sue kaan ra ted acredita S ILE Ese atn 420 Un O T IL uu CIL PA dase ud 420 Ee AN Aid A ac T 420 CB see control board GEMA ors edi atte eam AA AA 418 changed parameters mode eee lesu 72 Circuit DEG SIG coepi e mx ke boo ete ee ee hexane 384 ABB S200 B C miniature MCB 383 384 ABB Tmax moulded case MCCB 383 385 CIOCK 4 suo Sot vem ava ce serena d ERIT deiode ie 79 117 comm fault function parameter 149 237 fault time parameter 149 237 protocol select parameter 134 140 313 Index 431 ACH550 01 User s Manual relay output word data parameter 165 values data parameter o 165 compatibility manual with control panel operator keypad 59 wi
119. 392 ACH550 01 User s Manual Motor thermal protection According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter see Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS the function either monitors a calculated temperature value based on a motor thermal model or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon e motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or PT100 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Control connections Control connection specifications Analogue See section Hardware description on page inputs and 394 outputs Digital inputs See the footnote under the table in section Hardware description on page 394 Relays digital Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC outputs Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 VAC Max continuous current 2 A rms cos phi 1 1 Arms cos phi 0 4 Minimum current 10 mA 12 V DC Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV ms 1 minute Terminal See section Cable terminals on page
120. 4 17 use the formula in the following table C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 B Correcting reference All for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where 022595 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 272 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4014 FBK SEL 1 13 Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1
121. 5 oo no no CO AB N no 00467918 xls B Technical data 379 ACH550 01 User s Manual 200 V drives For 200 V drives in the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased by 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 hy Altitude derating In altitudes from 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB representative for further information see page 424 Single phase supply derating For 208 240 V series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching frequency derating The switching frequency control see parameter 2607 on page 228 can decrease the switching frequency instead of the current when the drive reaches the internal temperature limit This function is on by default For worst case sizing the maximum derating values are as follows If the 8 kHz switching frequency is used limit Py and hi to 80 If the 12 kHz switching frequency is used limit Py and law to 65 380 Technical data ACH550 01 User
122. 57 180A 4 180 195A A 205 246A 4 245 ACH550 01 i zz zd Es 5 9 7 4 9 7 12 4 15 8 21 4 27 7 4 56 JJ 8 8 11 9 15 4 23 31 38 45 44 59 72 87 JJ m nm JJ Co P N nS O N N on o Jl co JJ IN B C2 JJ ow JJ N 37 45 5 106 139 139 55 173 55 173 75 223 281 292 346 D J BIB JJ JJ oO gt A mt k UJ aN JJ C1 125 124 JJ al 00467918 xls hax Maximum output current allowed for 2 seconds every minute 3 6 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual IEC ratings 208 240 V drives Type code Valid up to 40 C ACH550 01 Max dd hax Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 46 0 75 63 06A6 2 66 8 3 4 07A5 2 7 11 9 7 D D D D 012A 2 13 5 017A 2 21 2 30 1 43 6 55 83 107 135 158 JJ 2 4 5 JJ N 024A 2 031A 2 046A 2 4 059A 2 9 8 6 5 075A 2 18 5 ie 21 48 JJ CO JJ Rh 088A 2 114A 2 114 143A 2 178A 2 221A 2 248A 2 00467918 xls hax Maximum output current allowed for 2 seconds every minute D J BIB D O Oo N gt bl a k UJ 0 7 2 3 3 4 5 2 2 3 1 1 1 5 2 0 5 7 5 2 0 7 5 5 75 5 0 20 346 Technical data 377 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Symbols Typical ratings Nominal rating 10 overload capability loN continuous rms current 1096 overload is allowed for one minute every ten minutes through the whole
123. 706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3 08 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 UNKNOWN DRIVE Wrong type of panel i e panel that supports TYPE ACH550 drive X but not the ACH550 has been SUPPORTED DRIVES X connected to the ACH550 Diagnostics and maintenance 361 ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault resetting The ACH550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source e g AUTO key is selected for start command and it is active the ACH550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn off the power for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following From the control panel press RESET Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used to reset the drive digital input serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started 362 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 and 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshoo
124. 8 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFA input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACH550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFA operation Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range Starting order counter Output The operation of the frequency Noaux 4aux 2aux starting order motors motor motors counter The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence Area The lowest Autochange parameter number is allowed PID output with a value 31 PFA identifies the FOIS relay connected to 1PFA the first motor and so on Initia
125. ACH550 efesotomasyon com User s Manual ACH550 01 Drives efesotomasyon com Ak ED ED FADED ACH550 Drive manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACH550 01 User s Manual 3AFE68258537 English ACH550 02 User s Manual 3AFE68262674 English ACH550 UH User s Manual 3AUA0000004092 English Safety Installation e Start up Diagnostics Maintenance Technical data HVAC Info Guide CD 3AFE68338743 English Detailed product description Technical product description including dimensional drawings Cabinet mounting information including power losses Software and control User interfaces and control connections Complete options descriptions Spare parts Etc Practical engineering guides PID amp PFA engineering guides Dimensioning and sizing guidelines Diagnostics and maintenance information Etc OPTION MANUALS delivered with optional equipment BACnet Protocol 3AUA0000004591 English Embedded Fieldbus EFB Control 3AFE68320658 English MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001935 English RETA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE64539736 English RLON 01 LonWorks Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE64798693 English Typical contents Safety Installation Programming Start up Fault tracing Technical data MAINTENANCE MANUALS Guide
126. ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit 53 5304 EFB PARITY 0 3 Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 06 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly Parameter listing and descriptions NG listing and descriptions 287 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT
127. AO1 above 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above 1512 FILTER AO2 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above 196 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description Range 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 Selects the source of the Run enable signal See the figure on page 202 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the Run enable signal This digital input must be activated for Run enable e f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the Run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the Run enable signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the Run enable signal Bit 6 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the Run disable signal e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the Run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for Run enable e If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the Run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted di
128. AULT 20s 2 1 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL FAULT FAULT C TCIXC U AIC HOW m zmj em 3s DOD HD 3 _ T _ O ol O Ol gt gt H DI UO O Ol op O w M o c mm eo Nm o a ba 5 S 5Hz 5Hz 0 0 1 s704 5H 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz LOW 10 10 5 5 rir ojo gt gt ojo ajn SA ojo B y e al 10 10 E O gt O 4 O D 300 300 HIGH TH 3706 300 300 2 370 25 Hz 25 Hz 3708 15 15 370 300 300 3 3710 43 Hz 43 Hz LOW 3 25 25 0 H 25 Hz 25 Hz CT ojo gt gt O O T Sm ojo 15 15 O gt O O D O Ed 300 300 43 Hz 43 Hz rir ojo gt gt UU 1 SA ojo ES S 25 25 O gt O al O D 300 300 HIGH 3 3712 300 300 4 3713 50 Hz 50 Hz 30 30 37 300 300 5 371 500 Hz 500 Hz LOW 5 37 30 30 HIGHS lone 300 300 50 Hz 50 Hz CIT ojo gt gt ojo n Sm ojo O gt O O D O wo a la FERRER 30 30 300 300 500 Hz 500 Hz CT ojo gt gt ojo T Sia ojo 30 30 O gt O EN O pu 300 300 338 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal time c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds oint PID PID c sp E bypass control index NOT SEL 2s 1 1 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 20s m o Nm o o mm eo o o
129. AULT WORD 1306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORDS OVERCURRENT MOT OVERTEMP Resened Reseved o PANELLOSS priem senos 30 DRUNFAL CONFIG FILE 0306 FAULT WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 e See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 e See parameter 0305 Parameter listing and descriptions 169 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 0308 ALARM WORD 1 Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 1 When an alarm is active the corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words e Each alarm has a dedicated bit allocated within Alarm Words Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the word The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O display 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 display 8000 SIR p308 ALam worD IN 6 OVERCURRENT OFFBUTTON o jNzLoss EMERGENCY STOP 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRSTSTART 10 reserved USERLOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 0309 ALARM WORD 2 Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 2 See parameter 0308 170 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 04 FAULT HISTORY This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description Range 0401 LAST FAULT fault codes control panel displays as text 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of t
130. CE STEP 3 8105 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 START FREQ 1 8109 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz START FREQ 2 8110 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz START FREQ 3 8111 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz LOW FREQ 1 8112 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz Low FREQs 811 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 5 5 0s 3 AUX MOT START D 5 0s 5 0 s LT O B m O no 2 to 2 m ps m O o a a Z ar o o gt AUX MOT STOP D NR OF AUX MOT AUTOCHNG INTERV 8 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 811 Os Os 1 REG BYPASS CTRL NO NO NO PFA START DELAY 0 50 s 0 50s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s PFA ENABLE 8123 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL EC IN A A A 00 N NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL Yo 50 096 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 A N 5 0 3 0 1 D N S S 14 O 5 0s 3 0s 1 DI4 NO 5 Q O z gt c L X STOP 8124 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL D UX START 8125 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL TIMED H T e126 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL worms ar 2 EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN EVEN 8128 RUNTIME RUNTIME RUNTIME RUNTIME RUNTIME RUNTIME SEL 9802 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL gt c Q O E Zz
131. CTIVATE 4228 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL TRIM MODE 4230 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL TRIM SCALE 4231 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 CORRECTIO SRC 4232 PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 A A 0 0 o ibp H B mN eo Z Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint Ag Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control 4201 420 420 420 420 420 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL 0 420 0 420 o Yo 100 0 420 421 acr acr 0 4211 421 0 0 0 421 421 A NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 421 al 421 421 NOT SEL vor set a228 EP NOT SEL vor set 42 o 421 421 4221 o 4231 5 ag LO o LO Co N O wo Po o e Co N O al Az wo PO 9 4232 Parameter listing and descriptions 345 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT 51 EXT FBA TYPE 5101 DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED COMM FBA PAR 102 COMM BAUD RATE 5202 9 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 9 6kb s 9 6kb s 9
132. Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump PID 1 OUTPUT 0126 PID 2 OUTPUT 0127 PID 1 SETPNT 0128 PID 2 SETPNT PID 1 FBK o o o e m w lo IN a lo PID 2 FBK PID 1 DEVIATION PID 2 DEVIATION COMM RO WORD COMM VALUE 1 COMM VALUE 2 PROCESS VAR 1 PROCESS VAR 2 PROCESS VAR 3 o a Co para o jo o o o kard 2 pa A C O O HO O o IN a QO o A RUN TIME MWH COUNTER REVOLUTION CNTR DRIVE ON TIME HI DRIVE ON TIME LO MOTOR TEMP o o a A a o jo CB TEMP INPUT KWH 3 INPUT MWH PID COMM VALUE 1 PID COMM VALUE 2 0159 316 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp Parameter listing and descriptions Hand E bypass control x yp o o 5 lav ao N o2 Co Po o al AB 99 m o de Co N O al AB wo Po o o Co N xD al A wo xU 317 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index FB CMD 3 FB ACTUAL WORD 1 0301 SIGNALS FB CMD HISTORY SPEED AT FLT 0404 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0406 CURRENT AT FLT 0407 TORQUE AT FLT 0408 STATUS AT FLT 0409 DI 1 8 AT FLT 0410 MEC EE ala DI 4 6 AT FLT 0411 Esla la a las PREVIOUS FAULT 1 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 0413 EXT1 10 START COMMANDS 1001 DI DI
133. D KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD SETPNT 4111 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 SETPOINT 4112 0 096 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SETPOINT 4113 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 4114 ACT ACT ACTI ACTA ACTA ACTA FBK MULTIPLIER 4115 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL ACT1 MINIMUM 4118 0 Yo 0 0 Yo Yo 0 0 0 O E zZ o no o o T zo x z 2 jSz 3 x m o D m A Biro xD Al2 N 0 0 ACTI MAXIMUM 4119 100 100 100 100 100 100 ACT2 MINIMUM 4120 0 0 0 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4121 100 10096 100 100 100 100 SLEEP SELECTION 4122 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL m sos WAKE UP DEV 4125 0 096 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WAKE UP 4126 0 50s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s o 11114 0 2 acre INPUT 0 0 U UU TU m mu 5 gt Colo lt sd PA m m m m TU TU Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control Par index alado ow n v os epas joao t es joes NN af sola snos 4101 410 N 410 410 410 410 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 KEYPAD KEYPAD a KEYPAD INTERNAL INTERNAL KEYPAD 0 410 0 410 o 100 0 410 do 0 4111 411 0 0 0 411 411 A 411
134. Defines the drive response to a control panel operator keypad communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets the speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets the speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds AN WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 232 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault 0 NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 I
135. Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Technical data What this chapter contains This chapter contains the following information ratings page 375 input power cable fuses and circuit breakers page 387 cable terminals page 388 input power mains connection page 388 motor connection page 389 control connections page 393 hardware description page 394 efficiency page 397 cooling page 397 dimensions and weights page 399 ambient conditions page 476 materials page 477 applicable standards page 478 provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE C Tick and UL marks page 478 warranty page 422 product protection in the USA page 423 contact information page 424 Ratings By type code the tables below provide ratings for the ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings in 40 C for 400 V and 200 V drives See the table on page 379 for available currents in other temperatures for 400 V drives frame size Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 378 Technical data 375 40 ACH550 01 User s Manual IEC ratings 380 480 V drives Type code Valid up to 40 C Max current Max Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 02A4 4 2 4 0 75 3 1 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 05A4 4 5 4 2 2 06A9 4 3 0 08A8 4 4 0 012A 4 5 5 015A 4 7 5 023A 4 031A 4 038A 4 045A 4 044A 4 059A 4 072A 4 087A 4 096A 4 125A 4 124A 4 157A 4 1
136. E Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB representative see page 424 28 SERIAL1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME e communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFBCONFILE Error in reading the configuration file for the fieldbus adapter 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus user s manual Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application The meaning is protocol dependent Diagnostics and maintenance 357 ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct motor fault e motor cable fault e thermal relay fault if used internal fault OUTP WIRING Error in power wiring suspected Check for and correct input power wired to drive output ground faults INCOMPATIBLE Loaded software is not compatible with the SW current drive type Contact your local ABB representative see page 77 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER CURVE LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB representative and r
137. EEP SELECTION 4022 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL m soos WAKE UP DEV 4025 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WAKE UP 4026 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s 0 50 s M SET 4027 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 0 acrieur 4016 ACT INPUT 0 0 0 0 0 U UU TU m mu o gt Colo lt sd PA m m m m TU U 2 O O gt I gt Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal time c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control Par index aoo N 400 100 0 100 0 400 09 emo seme a Temel INTERNAL INTERNAL eme a 401 0 Te 0 0 0 acr a NOT SEL avs we we no we ae A fim ae ae me ts 401 ple ad 401 NOT SEL 4022 sei seri seri seri os ao A SET 1 SET 1 4027 Parameter listing and descriptions 341 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 342 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index INTEGRATION TIME 4102 30s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s DERIVATION TIME 4103 00s 0 0 s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0 s 0 0 s PID DERIV FILTER 4104 10s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s ERROR VALUEINV 4105 NO NO NO NO NO NO UNIT SCALE 4107 0 VALUE 4108 VALUE 4109 100 0 100 0 100 096 100 0 100 0 100 0 SET POINT SEL 4110 KEYPAD KEYPA
138. FA controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors e This value includes also the speed regulated motor e This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFA if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFA but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER 1 EVEN RUNTIME 2 RELAY ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run times 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays 312 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 98 OPTIONS This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Code Description Range 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 5 Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates via a Modbus controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 2 N2 The drive communicates via an N2 controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 3 FLN The drive communicates via an FLN controller via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4
139. H Jo po po i 0 0 Co 0 1 0 Co 1 1 0 Constant speed 3 1204 Oo 0 1 Co 1 0 1 Constant speed 5 1206 HT TT onstant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven constant speeds 1 7 using DIS DI4 and Di5 See above DI1 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven constant speeds 1 7 using D14 DI5 and DI6 See above DI1 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMER 1 4 Selects constant speed 1 when timer is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 19 TIMER 1 amp 2 Selects a constant speed depending on the state of timers 1 and 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects constant speed 1 with digital input DI1 Inverse operation Digital input de activated constant speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Selects constant speed 1 with digital input See above nstant speed 4 1205 184 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated pit 012 Function 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 L1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DIS e See above DI1 2 INV for code
140. INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal e See DI1 INV above 1701 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 0 500 Hz Defines a preset frequency for the override The direction of rotation is defined by parameter 1003 Note Set this value if motor control mode parameter 9904 is SCALAR FREQ 3 1703 1704 OVERRIDE SPEED 0 30 000 rpm Defines a preset speed for the override The direction of rotation is defined by parameter 1003 Note Set this value if motor control mode parameter 9904 is VECTOR SPEED 1 OVERRIDE PASS CODE 0 65535 Entering the correct pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change Enter the pass code always before changing the value of parameter 1705 e See parameter 1705 below he pass code is 358 The entry reverts back to zero automatically Parameter listing and descriptions 207 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0 2 Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled 0 OFF Override disabled 1 ON Override enabled When enabled the drive stores the values of all parameters into an override parameter set See parameter 9902 and the parameters in group 17 will be write protected except parameter 1704 To change the other parameters in group 17 override has to be disabled 2 LOAD
141. MODE 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode VECTOR SPEED mode Optimal start in most cases Flying start function to a rotating axis and start at zero speed SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete VECTOR SPEED mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR FREQ mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYST Selects the flying start mode SCALAR FREQ mode only The drive will automatically select the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor Useful if the motor is already rotating and the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only May be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when the output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to re
142. MUM AI2 3 Owen o 2s nominal current 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal power See the figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 MAXIMUM ACT1 P 4019 P 1301 P1302 Source signal Source min Source max ACT1 B P 4018 P 1301 P 1302 Source signal Source min Source max 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 Sets the maximum value for ACT1 s See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 Sets the minimum value for ACT2 s See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Parameter listing and descriptions 275 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 276 Sets the maximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 Defines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function e Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activati
143. NO Disables Regulator by pass control The drive uses the normal PFA reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFA reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFA reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFA frequency reference The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A 308 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Mains 3 3 Contactors Outlet pipe 1 Cooling water tank Outlet pipe 2 Inlet pipe Outlet pipe 3 8122 PFA START DELAY Sets the start delay for soeed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows e Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACH550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay ZI WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFA Start Delay After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must switch to the star connec
144. NV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 2 Defines the drive response to motor overheating 0 NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT Displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP when the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C Displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop when the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C 2 ALARM Displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP when the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C Parameter listing and descriptions 233 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Motor load Temp rise 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor When set t
145. O ise este the ape PN ecce R T 11 acceleration deceleration parameter group 216 at aux stop PFA parameter n n nnana naana 311 compensation parameter eee eee 222 ramp select parameter 149 216 ramp shape parameter cee eee 217 ramp time PFA parameter 311 ramp zero select parameter 149 218 time parameter is ba oe ek We add or doe E oe Ng t 216 activate external PID parameter 281 actual input PID parameters 151 274 actual max PID parameters lesus 275 actual min PID parameters llle 275 actual signals parameter group ooo 167 ai loss alarmi codes er 66s a e beds 364 fa lt cod s UT E 354 air flow 208 240 V dives io as Genelia de os NG a 399 380 480 V drives anaana De io paves Gaan ordo ats 398 alarm tle MI PII 363 e ou ore tut e LIS d a L hee SUR eg 363 enable display parameter 203 FICC ALON MC 353 words data parameters ce eee eee 170 ambient conditions roll ERR X SX SEES 416 analogue I O CONMECIONS aaa bx Lc uer Eres KALAMPAG Rada bs 394 SPEC s Saura don ss hime AO BILLING OS oar dor KG 394 analogue input COMMOGHOMS oe d peter e o a tu ro hae cesar eet tee 394 data parameter vr d aua s aM Rer Same ara 163 fault limit parameterS o oooooooooooo 237 filter Daramelels sm Ore sucrose a
146. O or disabled with parameters Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 115 ACH550 01 User s Manual Connection example of a two wire sensor 116 Many ACH550 applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analogue input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams in this chapter show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor X1 control board PAT Tama mna mano d 6 AGND 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm X1 control board 24 V DC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 mA Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Real time clock and timed functions What this chapter contains This chapter contains the information for real time clock and timed functions Real time clock and timed functions The real time clock has the following features four daily times four weekly times timed boost function e g a set constant speed which is on for a certain pre programmed time Activated with a digital input timer enable with digital
147. OM FREQ 10 0 500 Hz Defines the nominal motor frequency e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Nom freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt Parameter listing and descriptions 159 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 9908 9910 160 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30000 rpm Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate MOTOR NOM POWER type dependent Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate ID RUN 0 OFF IDMAGN 1 STANDARD This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor Id Run During this process the drive operates the motor in order to identify its characteristics and then optimizes control by creating a motor model This motor model is especially effective when Operation point is near zero speed Operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder If no Motor Id Run is performed the drive uses a less detailed motor model created when the drive is first run This First Start id magnetization model is updated automatically after any motor parameter is changed To update the model the drive magnetizes the motor for 10 to 15 seconds at zero speed Creating the First Start model does require that eith
148. ORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 MAXTORQUE MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX SEL 2014 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 MIN TORQUE 1 2015 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 MIN TORQUE 2 2016 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 MAX TORQUE 1 2017 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 MAX TORQUE 2 2018 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 300 0 START 2101 RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP RAMP STOP 2102 COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST 2104 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL START 2108 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FF P SEL 2109 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL TORQ BOOST CURR 2110 100 10096 100 100 100 100 ang 0005 a 4 O JO EES OO G Sel GC m m Yo FUNCTION FUNCTION DC MAGN DC HOLD CTL DC CURR REF DC BRAKE INHIBIT 30 0 O m m pol D n o O a gt JJ Y O m gt lt Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint Saponi Hand alternation timer speeds point PID c sp E bypass control NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL m m Par index 1701 170 170 170 FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD 170 1706 CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT CONSTANT 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 15
149. PFA Relay Free Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Not allowed Parameter listing and descriptions Not allowed Free First PFA Relay DI6 Free Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay DI6 Free Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay DI6 Free Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Free Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Fifth PFA Relay Not allowed ot allowed ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled Pana DI2 Free Not allowed Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free BEEN DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay First PFA Relay DI6 Free DI6 Free DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Second PFA Relay DI6 Free Free DI2 Free DI2 Free
150. PID parameter Aa 281 OK messages count parameter 285 operating data parameter groyp 162 operating KAC AA e ardt 65 operator keypad r Z ra eI E ER RO 59 see control panel OPEX liri fault eels pita DT ba d aea pde 356 power fault code pin oe ee EET SE 356 options parameter group 2 6 ee eee 313 output frequency data parameter n aana aaan 162 OUID UT MOUS cura Qa aut haat dud ctii dion E 64 output voltage data parameter 162 output wiring fault code 00 eee 358 overcurrent alarm Code 2 3 2 20 4 a on atat ama a De acit ardeo eder 363 automatic reset parameter 238 AA d Oia 353 overload curve see user load curve override alat code nadar EROR ONG ECC a 366 direction parameter llle 208 enable parameter R a ees 208 frequency parameter llli 207 mode c acd a rane Anuna e teas 206 parameter group sese LERR o x SURE 205 parameler Sel oux Eua tees uu REESE 74 158 pass code parameter n cece eee ees 207 reference parameter ccc cence eee 208 selection parameter 0 0 00 e eee eee 207 speed parameter 0 0000 eee eee eee 207 overspeed fault Gode ce eee 357 overvoltage aarm eie bo Suede A ERU RE ts a eee oe 363 automatic reset parameter 239 P package ic RI ate Kapa 9 panel display variable
151. PID c sp E bypass control p 3101 0 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE 310 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 3201 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 500Hz 50 0Hz 500Hz 500Hz 50 0Hz 320 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 500Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 500Hz 500Hz 50 0Hz 320 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 3204 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 320 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 320 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 3209 Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware version version version version version version version version 3301 o 00 a S S ay Az 49 m co N xD al CL m al Co N 9 Par table Par table Par table Par table Par table Par table Par table Par table version version version version version version version version 3305 Parameter listing and descriptions 333 34 PANEL DISPLAY 334 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Par index OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT 401 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ SIGNAL 1 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 340 600 0 Hz 600 0Hz 600 0 Hz 600 0Hz
152. RAG EE Ra 129 assistance aero Siem ae EN 130 133 139 446 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual Serial MUMDER 29 aa DEFERT bine See ace dee te ars 16 SEVICE accid 2 il es ie eared gal er ile titu ho GaN are 11 setpoint maximum PID parameter 272 setpoint minimum PID parameter 272 setpoint select PID parameter 150 271 cc Tiv 73 short circuit fault code o ooooooooo oo 354 sleep selection PID parameter onnan anaana 276 slip compensation ratio parameter 228 speed at fault history parameter eee eee 171 data parameter a ci Vee xxx Ges eee ER 162 max limit parameter 2a rae eR REX XXX 209 min limit parameter llle 209 signed data parameter eee ee aee 162 speed control acceleration compensation parameter 222 automatic tuning parameter 223 derivation time parameter 221 integration time parameter 220 parameter drops ax se nt casal 219 proportional gain parameter 219 speed constant digital input selection parameter 183 palamigan u d eed s BM baog nated ve ee Lien 186 parameter group ex yde ra RR urease x ag 183 timer activated mode selection parameter 186 stall frequency fault parameter 236 function fault parameter o o oooooooo 236
153. RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS 0 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three relay outputs See parameter 0122 0124 AO 1 0 20 mA Analogue output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 AO2 0 20 mA Analogue output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 100096 Process PID PID1 controller output value in 96 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 10096 External PID PID2 controller output value in 96 PID 1 SETPNT unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and PID1 controller setpoint signal 4007 4107 Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 PID2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and PID1 controller feedback signal 4007 4107 Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK unit and scale defined par 4206 and 4207 PID2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 164 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and Difference between the PID1 controller 4007 4107 0 reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 133 PID 2 DEVIATION unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 Difference between the PID2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined
154. SABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays a fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop Parameter listing and descriptions 237 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time and then restarts automatically You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Description Range 3101 INUMBER OF TRIALS 0 5 Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined by 3102 TRIAL TIME e If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped e Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control 3 panel operator keypad or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred in the trial time The last is reset only if the value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or more Trial time T Nama Time 9 X x Automatic reset See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive 102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets restart e f DELAY TIME zero the dr
155. SPEED amp DIR DATA OUT FR E E POWER DC BUS VOLTAGE F F R O DRIVE TEMP EXTERNAL R R RUN TIME T EXTERNAL KWH COUNTER T PEED UTPUT Q QUE UTPUT EF 1 EF2 CTRL LOCATION R R APPL BLK OUTPUT DI 1 3 STATUS DI 4 6 STATUS 01 3 US RO 1 STAT 314 Parameter listing and descriptions O P A ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control Par 7 index ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 9901 PUMP INT TIMER FLOATING DUAL DUAL HAND ALTERN INT TIMER CS PNT SETPNT SPNT CS E BYPASS CONTROL 9902 SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR SCALAR FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 9904 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 9905 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 9907 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 9908 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN IDMAGN 9910 os os os ee o k o para 010 o e Parameter listing and descriptions 315 Oh ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC
156. See example below The minimum analogue input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al 1 These parameters reference and analogue min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See the figure for parameter 1105 Example To set the minimum analogue input value to 4 mA Configure the analogue input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percentage of the full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 100 Defines the maximum value of the analogue input Define value as a percentage of the full analogue signal range The maximum analogue input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See the figure for parameter 1105 1303 FILTER Al 0 10s Defines the filter time constant for analogue input 1 A11 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified Unfiltered signal Filtered signal Time constant 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 100 Defines the minimum value of the analogue input s See MINIMUM Al1 above Parameter listing and descriptions 187 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0 100 Defines the maximum value of the analogue input e See MAXIMUM Al1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 0 10 s Defines the filter time constant for analogue input 2 A12 See FILTER AI1 above 188 Parameter listing and
157. Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 16 DM DI5 Interlock Deactivation stops the motor 18 DIE Not used Disable enable with parameter 1601 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Not used Interlock Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 101 ACH550 01 User s Manual 8 Internal timer This application macro is for applications where the motor is started and stopped with a built in timer This macro has also a boost function which operates the motor after digital input 3 DI3 has been momentarily activated An example of the timer usage is shown below For further information see chapter Real time clock and timed functions When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the
158. TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The major or minor revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision differs from that stated in the drive s configuration file 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0 0xFFFF Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 284 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 52 PANEL COMM This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel operator keypad there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description Range 5201 STATION ID 1 247 Defines the address of the drive s Two units with the same address are not allowed on line 5 e Range 1 247 202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 Defines the commu
159. UM AC2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py lt 2 6 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or PN 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are hp e g in US Diagnostics and maintenance 859 and maintenance 359 Fault Fault name in code the panel l 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING o 1 010 PAR PFA amp OVERRIDE 1011 PAR OVERRIDE 360 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description and recommended corrective action Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following e extension relay module not connected and 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct the following A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR FREQ when 8123 PFA ENABLE is activated Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 16 0 8 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor poles 0 992 Override mode is enabled and PFA is activated at the same time This cannot
160. URVE 1000 PAR HZRPM PAR FBUS gt A PAR USER LOAD C Commissioning the override mode Enter the parameters in all groups as needed except group 17 Select the digital input that will activate override mode P 1701 Enter the frequency or speed reference for override mode P 1702 or P 1703 according to the motor control mode P 9904 Enter the pass code P 1704 358 Enable the override mode P 1705 Changing the override parameters If override mode is already enabled disable it Enter the pass code P 1704 Disable the override mode P 1705 If needed load the override parameter set P 9902 Change the parameters as needed except group 17 Change the parameters in group 17 as needed Digital input for override mode P 1701 e Frequency or speed reference P 1702 or P 1703 Enter the pass code P 1704 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual 6 Enable the override mode P 1705 The drive replaces the override parameter set with new values of all parameters Code Description Range OVERRIDE SEL 6 6 Selects the source of the override activation signal 0 NOT SEL Override activation signal not selected 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the override activation signal This digital input must be activated for override activation signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal See DI1 above 1 DI1
161. User s Manual Lifting the drive The figure below shows how to lift the drive Note Lift the drive only from the metal chassis 10 Contents of this manual ACH550 01 User s Manual Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type code and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Drives Sales Support and Service network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Drives Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Contents of this manual 11 12 ACH550 01 User s Manual Contents of this manual ACH550 01 User s Manual Preparing for installation What this chapter contains This chapter contains instructions for preparing for the installation of the drive It contains the drive identification wiring and EMC guidelines and a list of tools necessary for the installation Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if th
162. able environment as defined in section Suitable environment and enclosure on page 22 For horizontal installation contact ABB for more information see page 424 Mounting on a machine frame is also possible No additional plates are needed for cooling as the drive has an integral heatsink backplate See section Mounting dimensions on page 400 for mounting dimensions for all frame sizes and protection types The figure below shows the necessary free space for the installation of the unit R1 R6 IP21 amp IP54 200 mm 8 in IP21 amp IP54 0 mm 0 in IP21 amp IP54 0 mm 0 in NS IP21 amp IP54 200 mm 8 in Preparing for installation 23 ACH550 01 User s Manual Make sure that the hot air does not re circulate into the drive The figure below show the minimum space for cooling air NNNNN SS III IISIII SI sx IO SN 24 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Stop the hot air from a drive from entering the cooling air intake of another drive with an adequate mechanical obstacle between the drives The figure below shows the minimum space for cooling air Preparing for installation 25 ACH550 01 U
163. activation stops the drive Not used Not used Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 113 ACH550 01 User s Manual 14 Hand control 114 This application macro is intended to be used when commissioning with Spin the Motor assistant where all analogue and digital inputs are disabled by default The drive is started with the HAND key and giving the speed reference with the arrow keys Note Starting in the AUTO mode requires configuring the I O with parameters or the assistant or selecting another macro recommended Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Hand control Signal cable shield screen Not used laa Analogue input circuit common Reference voltage 10 V DC Not used BE Analogue input circuit common Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Output current 0 4 20 mA ees Analogue output circuit common Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Common for DI return signals DCOM Digital input common for all Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 118 DIE Not used Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I
164. al o 411 411 4121 412 N 412 o ACT acr NOT SEL NOT SEL we mo ae no ae ae ve A a ae se nets lala NOT SEL NOT SEL al a A iN E a a kard o BR lo o lo o o o m o e lu o o X la 412 Parameter listing and descriptions 343 344 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index INTEGRATION TIME 4202 60 0s 60 0s 60 0s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s DERIVATION TIME 4203 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s PID DERIV FILTER 4204 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s 1 0s ERROR VALUE INV 4205 NO NO NO NO NO NO O o E zZ o EP N o I o UNIT SCALE Yo VALUE 4209 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 SET POINT SEL 4210 INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL o o SETPNT 421 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 SETPOINT 212 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E SETPOINT 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 2 2 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 T zo x z 2 jSz 4 x m o D 5 2 pA IS FBK MULTIPLIER 4215 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL ACT1 INPUT 4 Jc 1 0 2 ACT2 INPUT 12 A 4 A ACTI 0 0 N IS NI a bre o o BR uo MINIMUM 4 ACTI MAXIMUM 4219 100 100 100 100 100 100 ACT2 MINIMUM 2 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4221 100 10096 10096 10096 10096 10096 A
165. ame settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 2 Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol No effect on BACnet behavior 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of the Control Word and Status Word conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A time out has occurred in t
166. ameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 s Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors he output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 294 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 8117 INR OF AUX MOT 0 4 Sets the number of auxiliary motors e Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals he Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACH550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 e An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFA defines the relay as used for PFA The ACH550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function
167. ameter group 158 station id RS 232 parameter 285 status at fault history parameter 171 status information of drive 0 0 eee 64 stop aux motor PFA parameters 293 aux motor delay PFA parameter 294 day paramelers u tJ RES ee hora OUR ee T eO P HER a 255 DC brake time parameter eee 214 DC current braking selection parameter 214 DC current ref parameter 0c eee 214 emergency select parameter 215 emergency alarm code 000 eee eee 366 flux braking parameter llli 226 function parameter 0 0 0 0 cee ee ees 214 parameter Oro sar a3 papa ERO EIS gece ee Oe 213 time parameters iba NG apa S arora ed deste eere 255 supervision parameter QrOup cue tee etre bine cabe tae eder catt 240 parameter high limit parameters 241 parameter low limit parameters 241 parameter selection parameters 240 supply fan application Macro oooooooooooooo 90 supply phase fault code n n eee eee 356 switching frequency control parameter 228 switching frequency parameter 228 system controls parameter group 197 T tasks see assistants technical data sado a ce ke eck wh dit de aNG te re 375 448 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual template c
168. ameters 144 178 select parameter group aa 176 reference step PFA parameters 291 reforming capacitors s s x3 toe mrs eau Cos acero ee 373 regulator by pass control parameter 308 relay output activation condition parameters 145 189 COMMECHONS ce PLoS Ce EH A d HAL A 394 off delay parameters 0 0 eee ees 192 on delay parameters 00 eee ees 192 parameter GROUP ss oue e e e ee el eA ee e 189 status data parameters 164 remote control see AUTO mode replacement ecl E M DES 374 erslerie rolr TT EDU 373 internal enclosure fan llle 372 Meal tor AA 368 man faM eenaa enna EE CROP 369 reset automatic analogue input less than min parameter 239 delay time parameter 0 000 e eee 238 external fault parameter n cee eee 239 Index 445 ACH550 01 User s Manual number of trials parameter 238 overcurrent parameter aaa aaa 238 overvoltage parameter a 239 parameter QrOUD suede Bm ELE coe eae nk Ay 238 trial time parameter 2 0 00 cee eee 238 undervoltage parameter 239 resonance avoiding select parameter 0 00 eee 224 restore the default factory setting 63 return fan application Macro 00 0 eee eee 92 revolution motor counter parameter 0 4 2 sse ve ee
169. amotor Mode cessum duni de aa 66 Assistants mode sese 68 Changed parameters mode sees sees 72 Drive parameter backup mode 73 Time and date mode sss 79 VO settings Mode ina a 82 Fault logger Mode 83 5 Application macros and wiring 65 What this chapter contains ssssuesssse 85 ADPICANONS aia E 85 Selecting an application macro 86 Restoring defaults sese 87 T AVAG default aaa 88 2 SUDDIV T cete di trac ecce eid rhe 90 Sutter UN cid O 92 4 Cooling tower fan 94 Table of contents ACH550 01 User s Manual Be COMO SINS EP sMiselei isque teer 75 PUMP AISI AM OM er 8 Internal timer eese 9 Internal timer with constant speeds Powered roof ventilator M 10 Floating eiei e 11 Dual setpoint PID iii 12 Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 13 E bypass USA only sss TAs Hand COMMON MH ii Connection example of a two wire sensor 6 Real time clock and timed functions What this chapter contains ssssss Real time clock and timed functions Using ING Her aezet i Example of timer USO see eee eee eee nenne 7 Serial COommunicaioansg cs ssc ccc c cc ee eee eaae What this chapter con
170. an be performed in two ways 1 using the Start up assistant or 2 changing the parameters individually At the first start the drive activates the Start up assistant You can restart it and its individual tasks in the Assistants mode as described in section Assistants mode on page 68 1 Start up by using the Start up assistant To start the Start up assistant follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to Commission drive with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Change the values suggested by the Start up assistant to your preferences and then press SAVE after every change 60 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual 5 After selecting the macro specify whether you want to use the mechanical HAND OFF AUTO switch To be able to use the switch EXT1 HAND Start command must be connected to DI1 and EXT2 a Start command to After completing a task the Start up assistant asks if you want to continue with the next one Press OK when Continue is highlighted to continue with the next task select Skip with the UP DOWN keys and press OK to move to the next task without doing this one or press EXIT to stop the Start up assistant The Start up assistant will guide you through the start up For more information see section Assistants mode on page 68 Start up and control panel 61 ACH550 01 User s Manual 2 Start up
171. and a 1 in Bit 15 display 8000 Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 STOP FBLOCAL CTL 1 START FBLOCAL REF 2 REVERSE START DISABLE1 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 4 SET EXT2 Reserved 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 e See parameter 0301 Parameter listing and descriptions 167 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Read only copy of the Status Word 1 e The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words Bit 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 READY ALARM 1 ENABLED NOTICE STARTED DIRLOCK DROC o PECELERATE esed 7 AT SETPOINT CPY CTL 8 LIMIT CPY REF1 SUPERVISION 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK 0304 FB STS WORD 2 Read only copy of the Status Word 2 e See parameter 0303 168 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 0305 FAULT WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words See Fault listing on page 353 for a description of the faults The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O display 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 display 8000 Bit 806 F
172. and guides you through the necessary set up If the name of FBA parameter is not self explanatory the assistant first tells you which information is expected from you The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5127 is activated Protocol selection Description Range 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 5 Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE FBA communication parameters Description Range 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not connected Check chapter Mechanical installation in the fieldbus user s manual and check that parameter 9802 is set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 2 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANopen 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 140 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5102 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 0 65535 Refer to the communication module documentation for more 5126 information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 DONE 1 REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings 0 DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically
173. and press OK To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press OK If you press HELP you can view the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area Press EXIT twice to return to the main menu Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual I O settings mode The I O settings mode is used for viewing and editing the I O settings To view and edit the I O settings follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Scroll to l O SETTINGS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to the I O setting you want to view with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Select the setting you want to view with the UP DOWN keys and press OK You can change the value with the UP DOWN keys and save it by pressing SAVE If you do not want to change the setting press CANCEL Press EXIT three times to return to the main menu 82 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault logger mode The Fault logger mode is used for viewing faults You can view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault To view the faults follow the s
174. anty given by the manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties express or implied arising by operation of law or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office see page 424 The technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications without prior notice 422 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Product protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 589 754 5 942 874 6 184 740 6 305 464 6 396 236 6 600 290 6 859 374 6 958 923 6 985 371 7 036 223 7 082 374 7 164 562 7 227 325 D510 320 D521 466 D548 183 5 301 085 5 612 604 5 952 613 6 195 274 6 313 599 6 448 735 6 741 059 6 922 883 6 967 453 6 992 908 7 045 987 7 084 604 7 176 779 7 245 197 D511 137 D541 743S Other patents pending Technical data 5 463 302 5 654 624 6 094 364 6 229 356 6 316 896 6 498 452 6 774 758 6 940 253 6 972 976 6 999 329 7 057 908 7 098 623 7 190 599 7 262 577 D511 150 D541 744S D541 745S 5 921 483 5 799 805 6 147 887 6 252 436 6 335 607 6 552 510 6 844 794 6 934 169 6 977 449 7 023 160 7 059 390 7 102 325 7 215 099 D503 931 D512
175. are revision parameter 141 283 config file id revision parameter 141 283 config file revision parameter 141 284 COMMON Sue PA AA AS 131 drive control parameters o 143 Ebe PD 152 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 141 284 fieldbus modules appl program rev parameter 142 284 436 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 141 283 fieldbus parameters a 141 283 fieldbus status parameter 141 284 fieldbus type parameter n anaana aan 140 283 protocol select parameter 140 313 protocol selection v uos eae ICI Sede a b PAKA 140 serial communication assistant 139 setting up communication a 139 feedback multiplier PID parameter 0a 273 on drive manuals e a la aee edet 11 select PID parameter 150 273 fieldbus command words data parameters 167 COMO laka x s o Pr nS hee oe dox quar dod iot Ie 131 embedded fieldbus EFB comm protocol par group 287 external comm module FBA parameter group 283 fault CodeS rs visos dnd Ex S Mex beds 152 protocol select parameter 313 status words data parameters n naana onnaa 168 see also EFB embedded fieldbus see also FBA fieldbus adapter firmware test date parameter a 243 version of the drive s firmware parameter
176. art push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DIS Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse DI5 de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD control panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated e Stop both DI1 and DI2 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 11 TIMER 1
177. ase A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI See the figure on page 247 The lowest limit HI 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit active Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit 240 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description
178. ation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 97 ACH550 01 User s Manual 6 Booster pump 98 This application macro is for booster pump applications where the pump speed is controlled according to the signal received from the transducer See the figure below When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended Copyright 2007 ABB Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Booster pump 1 SCR mur an AGND Analogue input circuit common ASF EGG ans E EJE E 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al ro ae Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit common LL posue mu AO1 Output freq
179. bient l temperature cables with concentric copper shield i not more than nine cables laid on cable Lab db sa del Dare ia E s carrying conductors in ladder side by side raceway or cable or earth directly buried copper cables with concentric copper shield Al cable Max load Cu wire size load load current current current A A mm A AWG kcmil m e are mr sm 9 257 74 ms sm mr eee ur o 153 3x70 2 3x 155 3x50 386 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 PVC insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature cables with concentric copper shield not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder side by side Al cable load load current current Based on NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires 90 C 194 F wire insulation 40 C 104 F ambient temperature not more than three current carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried copper cables with concentric copper shield Max load Cu wire size current AWG kcmil 250 MCM or 2x1 300 MCM or 2x1 0 350 MCM or 2x2 0 Note 1 Mains cable sizing is based on a correction factor of 0 71 maximum of 4 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side ambient temperature 30 C 86 F EN 60204 1 and IEC 364 5 523 For other conditions dimension the cables according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and
180. by changing the parameters individually To change the parameters follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Select the appropriate parameter group with the oe keys and press EL Select the appropriate parameter in a group with the UP DOWN keys Press EDIT to change the parameter value Press the UP DOWN keys to change the parameter value Press SAVE to store the modified value or press CANCEL to leave the set mode Any modifications not saved are cancelled Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to the main menu To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see chapter Parameter listing and descriptions 62 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual For detailed hardware description see chapter Technical data Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To replace the displayed value of a parameter with the default value press the UP DOWN keys simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are the following parameter groups Group 99 START UP DATA Group 10 START STOP DIR Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS Group 20 LIMITS Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2and Group 42
181. ceeding the overload curve 3 BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve Motor torque 96 Overload area P3706 P3709 P3712M53715 P3718 P3714 P3717 Allowed operating area P3705 Underload area P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716 Output frequency Hz 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 FAULT 2 ALARM Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Parameter listing and descriptions 259 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10 400 s Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 0 600 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Pa TORQ HIGH 1 0 600 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point
182. cheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 420 UL marking The ACH550 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum The ACH550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM TIME The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 416 for specific limits Note For open type enclosures i e drives without the conduit box and or cover for IP21 UL Type 1 drives or without the conduit plate and or top cover for IP54 UL Type 12 drives the Technical data 419 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with National Electric Code and local electrical codes IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Ele
183. ck The control panel can select HAND and control the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enables the HAND selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select HAND and cannot control the drive 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enables the HAND selection 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 INV above PARAM SAVE OzDONE 1 SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel operator keypad are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory
184. ck signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PEA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI5 First PFA Relay DI6 First PFA Relay DI6 Free Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free D15 First PFA Relay DI6 Second PFA Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated motor Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 No PFA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFA Relay Not allowed Not allowed Parameter listing and descriptions 307 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description REG BYPASS CTRL OzNO 1 YES Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator oUT MAX P8109 B ea C A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications 0
185. contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PEA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 DI1 DI2 DIS DI4 DI5 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIS DI6 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIS DI6 DI6 Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay DI6 Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay DI6 Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA R
186. controller 5 Terminate AGND wire at the Reference terminal in the building automation controller Setting up communication through EFB Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the drive must be connected to the fieldbus according to the instructions given in this manual and manuals Embedded Fieldbus EFB Control 132 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual 3AFE68320658 English and BACnet Protocol 3AUA0000004591 English The communication between the drive and the fieldbus is then activated by selecting the appropriate protocol with parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL After the communication is initialized the configuration parameters become available in parameter Group 58 EFB PROTOCOL in the drive Setting up EFB with the Serial Communication assistant is shown below The related parameters are described starting from page 134 Setting up EFB with the Serial Communication assistant To set up EFB follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to Serial Communication and press SEL Select the protocol with the UP DOWN keys and press SAVE Continue the guided set up with the assistant Changes made to EFB communication parameters group 53 do not take effect until you perform one of the following Serial communications 133 ACH550 01 User s Manual Cycle the drive power OFF and ON or e Set parameter 5302 to O
187. ctivates the Start disable 2 signal e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the Start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the Start enable 2 signal e See DI1 INV above DISPLAY ALARMS OzNO 1 YES Controls the visibility of the following alarms e 2001 OVERCURRENT 2002 OVERVOLTAGE 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP For more information see section A arm listing on page 363 0 NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled Parameter listing and descriptions 203 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 1611 PARAMETER VIEW 0 DEFAULT 204 1 FLASHDROP Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device The FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows easy customizing of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual JAFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 LOAD FD SET 0 DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists are shown 1 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list is shown Does not include short parameter list Parameters that are h
188. ctromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C1 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the first environment Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Compliance wi
189. d unit below the unit 0 mm O in along each side of the unit Technical data 397 10 398 ACH550 01 User s Manual Air flow 380 480 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 V drives at full load Drive E eee S E W AAA a e O e TRE ie Nue A A ae 012A 4 CS KK LEM WEN GE 3 667 907 3825 cara m ao ee KA Bei fe Da ee me Dum mm qms es me 00467918 xls B Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Air flow 208 240 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 V drives Drive no IF SN E L AE me CON EC A E LC EN lo AM a lan 012A 2 ane e E ee pu m eed 405 405 00467918 xls B Dimensions and weights The dimensions and mass for the ACH550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of frame size find first the Type code on the drive labels Then look up this type code in section Ratings on page 375 to determine the frame size Pages 404 415 show the dimensional drawings of the different frame sizes for each degree of protection A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACH550 drives can be found on the HVAC Info Guide CD 3AFE68338743 English Technical data 399 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Mounting dimensions pue See detail A a al RS Mn n nt e See detail B S b d R Detail A Detail B xo032 IP54 UL Type 12 and IP2
190. d Shield e PE Not allowed for motor cables CE amp C Tick Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase conductor cross section up to 10 mm s D0 Preparing for installation 29 ACH550 01 User s Manual Effective motor cable screens The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the screen the lower the radiated emission level The figure below shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lapp Kabel or MCCMK Draka NK Cables Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2 30 Braided metallic screen L3 Clamp the cable shield into the gland plate at the drive end twist the cable screen wires together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connect it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive if you are using a cable without a separate PE conductor Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows the grounding principles of cables SUPPLY CABLE MOTOR CABLE As short unshielded wires as possible Cable shielding covered with conductive tape Short pigtail Conductive shielding and compression seal Clamping nut BI Continuity of Cable Faraday cage At the motor end the motor cable screen must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the sc
191. e You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the proportional gain K Gain 1 NG Integration time 0 Tp Derivation time 0 Error value ntroller Controller Controller output output e Error value K e E t Parameter listing and descriptions 219 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 600 00 s 220 Sets the integration time for the speed controller e The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes for a constant error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the integration time K Gain 1 ns Integration time 5 O Tp Derivation time 0 Controller output e Error value t Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change s f the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed con
192. e 260 torque parameterS oooooooooo mo 260 261 user parameter set change control parameter naaa aasa aaa 199 V voltage at fault history parameter o o ooooooooo 171 voltage frequency ratio parameter 227 W wake up delay PID parameter nonan nnana 278 wake up deviation PID parameter 278 Waranty sasani exei dorf adit e SOR Sod ot oe ba ete ets 422 WRIQUIIS iu do toe ds cu Sue mt at MB oe e dS RUE 399 401 Le ERE 26 COMO seu ec Dae he ae oes En OE SEN 47 51 Taul PAramolo anar cd dra 237 POWER in ius r 44 48 termes et eat va v e ertet d EE Cedar d 42 43 XYZ zero speed load fault parameter 234 450 Index APOGEE is a registered trademark of Siemens Building Technologies Inc BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Ethernet IP is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus Modbus Plus and Modbus TCP are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc PROFIBUS
193. e Reforming on stored page 373 Every nine to See Replacement on page 373 Every three years depending on the ambient temperature and duty cycle HVAC control panel Every ten years See Control panel battery change on page 374 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Heatsink The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty sink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually In a dusty environment check more often Check the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the cooling fan see Main fan replacement on page 369 3 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room 4 Reinstall the cooling fan 5 Restore power Main fan replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink tempe
194. e control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI INV above Parameter listing and descriptions 211 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximu
195. e ee Rees 423 PE earth fault parameter n n eee ees 236 see cables input power see cable terminals PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage 396 PFA acceleration time parameter 311 aux motor start delay parameter 294 aux motor stop delay parameter 294 aux start order parameter 312 control parameter group ber sortea 290 deceleration time parameter 311 enable parameter oetra diti 0 00 cee eee RR ees 310 interlock alarm code xaxa tercd EE Eciam 366 low frequency parameters 293 motors parameter m autas ce e Aged wake tre het 312 number of aux motors parameter 295 reference step parameters 291 start delay parameter 0000 cee eee 309 Index 443 ACH550 01 User s Manual start frequency parameters a nn nonan annan 292 PID 096 actual signal parameter 270 100 actual signal parameter 270 actual input select parameters 151 274 actual value max parameters o 275 actual value min parameters 275 adjustment procedure 000 eee eee eee 267 comm value 1 data parameter 166 controllers OVervieW o o oooooooo oo 264 correction source parameter 282 decimal point actual signal para
196. e index SEL 2201 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL ACCELER TIME 1 2202 30 0s 15 0s 15 0s 30 0 s 10 0s 5 0s ACCELER TIME 2 2205 60 0s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0s 60 0s E RAMP INPUT 0 2209 NO CONTROL INTEGRATION TIME 2302 2 50s 2 50s 2 50s 2 50s 2 50s 2 50s DERIVATION TIME 2303 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms ACC COMPEN SATION 2304 0 00 s 0 00 s 0 00 s 0 00 s 0 00 s 0 00 s AUTOTUNE RUN 2305 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CRIT SPEED 25 CRITICAL SEL 2501 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF SPEEDS CRIT SPEED 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 1LO 2502 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm CRIT SPEED 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 HZ 0 HZ 0 HZ 1 HI 2503 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm CRIT SPEED 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 HZ 0 HZ 0 HZ 0 HZ 2 LO 2504 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm CRIT SPEED 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 HZ 0 HZ 0 Hz 2 HI 2505 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm CRIT SPEED 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 HZ 0 HZ 0 Hz 3 LO 2506 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm CRIT SPEED 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 HZ 0 HZ 0 HZ 3 HI 2507 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm FLUX OPT 26 MOTOR ENABLE 2601 ON ON ON ON ON ON CONTROLS FLUX IR COMP VOLT 2603 OV oV 0 V OV oV OV IR COMP FREQ 2604 50 50 50 50 50 50 U F RATIO 2605 SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SWITCHING FREQ 2606 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz SWITCH FREQ CTRL 2607 ON ON ON ON ON ON SLIP COMP RATIO 2608 0 0 0 0
197. e noise is filtered from the signal Parameter listing and descriptions 267 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 s NOT SEL 268 0 1 600 s Defines the integration time of the PID controller Integration time is by definition the time required to increase the output by the error value Error value is constant and 100 Gain 1 Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 10096 change is achieved in 1 second 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of the controller 0 1 600 0 Integration time seconds See 4001 for the adjustment procedure D P 4001 10 C P 4001 1 P4002 gt A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual ese Dess pn Range 003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s Defines the derivation time of the PID controller You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 Disables the error derivative part of the PID controller output 0 1 10 0 Derivation time Seconds Proce
198. e recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Preparing for installation 13 ACH550 01 User s Manual Drive identification IP54 labels The location and the contents of the labels for the IP54 degree of protection are shown in the figure below ACH550 0 1 022A 44B055 sa MINA peak 1070200188x AER Di EM i HEE RoHS MELIA 0188 un 1284 PN Input Ul dR Tiama Molar ACH550 01 023A 4 B055 Note The location of the labels may vary between different frame sizes 14 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual IP21 labels The location and the contents of the labels for the IP21 degree of protection are shown in the figure below ACRI O1 AAT 1 ACHs550 01 0643 4 DULL m S t potenti 40x ut n S 1 UL type 1 NEMA a t C a Ni PLANO n B TF ee iD m mo 12M GB A A oso LULU M ALL Motor 3 0 kW 10651 Ox ACH550 01 06A9 4 Forme nigra see Una Marai Note The location of the labels may vary between different frame sizes Preparing for installation 15 16 ACH550 01 User s Manual Type code The contents of the drive type code shown on the labels are described below ACH550 01 08A8 4 AC HVAC Drive 550 product series Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance UH Setup and part
199. e recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and if the drive is not provided with the RoHS marking the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB representative see page 424 417 Technical data 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Applicable standards The drive complies with the following standards Applicable standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations IEC EN 60204 1 Safety of machinery Electrical 2005 equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device e a supply disconnecting device IEC EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by 2004 enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 Insulation coordination for equipment 2002 within low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61000 3 12 EMC standard limiting harmo
200. e rici dita 187 less than min auto reset parameter 239 less than min fault parameter 232 l ss alatmicOdes c a a Iun E MES 364 loss fault CodeS cocoa eiie AA 354 maximum parameters 0c eee eee ees 187 minimum parameters 00 eee eee 187 Index 429 ACH550 01 User s Manual parameter group s xu ve ahead Pea Ere ROT ERR 187 ref correction formula 000000 cee eee ees 180 analogue output COMNECUONS 24 450 purr een pee AE EBA eee NAT TANA 394 content max parameters 146 195 content min parameters 146 195 current max parameters n n anaana naaa 147 195 current min parameters 146 195 data content parameters 146 194 data parameter auaa aaea 164 filter parameters nnana 147 195 parameter group s os kna at eee wend ee acu 194 application block output data parameter 163 application macro parameter sess 158 applications macros 4 i3 eee ee x OR EER Rd 85 booster PUMP f fcrri oS Meee we dei a ee uet ant 98 Condensers uini canit cate aba rod qua arama e 96 cooling tower fan ss Sax Pah eee See eee ewes 94 dual setpoint PID zs os us NG BOS Wahh ee aia 108 dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 110 CODA lt A ce a CHE 112 floating DOIN s s m eae a na td eel eee e t tora 106 HANG CONTO iw srta ee tiers AA nde tna 114 HVAC dorsi ne omatus aca oc eR m Qe ga
201. e sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pigtail Keep the pigtail short to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove sheathing at the cable clamp U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 6 Route both cables through the clamps 7 Strip and connect the input power and motor wires and the input power grounding wire to the drive terminals Frame size R6 See the figures on page 46 8 Connect the pigtail created from the motor cable screen to the ground Note Check the cable lengths according to section Wiring and EMC considerations on page 26 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Control wiring IP21 1 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s Input power and motor cables are not shown in the figure 2 Strip the control cable sheathing Installing the drive 51 ACH550 01 User s Manual 3 Route the control cable s through the clamp s and tighten the clamp s 4 Connect the ground screen for digital and analogue l O cables at X1 1 5 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See chapter Application macros and wiring 6 Install the connection box cover one screw Tightening torque 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equ
202. e the Parameters mode To start the Start up assistant follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to Commission drive with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then press SAVE after every change Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual 5 After selecting the macro specify whether you want to use the mechanical HAND OFF AUTO switch After completing a task the Start up assistant asks if you want to continue with the next one Press OK when Continue is highlighted to continue with the next task select Skip with the UP DOWN keys and press OK to move doing this one or press to the next task without EXIT to stop the Start up assistant The Start up assistant will guide you through the start up To start an individual assistant from the menu follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to the assistant you want to use References 1 amp 2 is used here as an example with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Start up and control panel 69 ACH550 01 User s Manual Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then press SAVE after every change Pressing EXIT stops the assistant After the assistant has completed the task you
203. ed Check chapter Mechanical installation in the fieldbus user s manual and check that parameter 9802 is set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 2 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANopen 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 5102 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 0 65535 pios Refer to the communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 DONE 1 REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings 0 DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 configuration file identification File configuration information depends on the drive application 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 0xFFFF Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s program Parameter listing and descriptions 283 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 0xFFFF Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 2
204. ed with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC sig Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 IO COMM and sets the speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until 3 Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 AI FAULT LIMIT 0 100 Sets a fault level for analogue input 1 See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 Sets a fault level for analogue input 2 See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION WIRING FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for e Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTP WiRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 DISABLE No response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE Displays a fault when this monitoring detects problems 3024 CB TEMP FAULT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE Defines the drive response to control board overheating Not for drives with an OMIO control board 0 DI
205. edback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC default for typical BMS applications 1 SCR mur Al L HAH joo Analogue input circuit common E 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 A2 Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA OT Mares Analogue input circuit common pA Mr AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S au AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U eee Analogue output circuit common 24V GND Common for DI return signals Ei Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DIZ DI3 DI4 DI5 Not used En Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable enable with parameter 1608 3 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 10 a Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Not used Constant speed 1 par 1202
206. eeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize the relay when the second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 SUPERVISION 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize the relay when the third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 SUPERVISION 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize the relay when the third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 SUPERVISION Parameter listing and descriptions 189 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 14 AT SET POINT Energize the relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize the relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME 16 FLT ALARM Energize the relay when a fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize the relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize the relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize the relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize the relay when the reference or active control location is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize the relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize the relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize the relay when a drive or control board overtempera
207. eland Dublin Tel 853 1 405 7300 Fax 353 1 405 7312 Israel Haifa Tel 972 4 850 2111 Fax 972 4 850 2112 Italy Milan Tel 39 02 2414 3085 Fax 39 02 2414 3979 Ivory Coast Abidjan Tel 225 21 35 42 65 Fax 225 21 35 04 14 Japan Tokyo Tel 81 0 3 5784 6010 Fax 81 0 3 5784 6275 Jordan Amman Tel 962 6 562 0181 Fax 962 6 5621369 Technical data Kazakhstan Almaty Tel 7 3272 583838 Fax 7 3272 583839 Kenya Nairobi Tel 254 20 828811 13 to 20 Fax 254 20 828812 21 Kuwait Kuwait city Tel 965 2428626 ext 124 Fax 965 2403139 Latvia Riga Tel 371 7 063 600 Fax 4371 7 063 601 Lithuania Vilnius Tel 370 5 273 8300 Fax 370 5 273 8333 Luxembourg Leudelange Tel 352 493 116 Fax 352 492 859 Macedonia Skopje Tel 389 23 118010 Fax 389 23 118 774 Malaysia Kuala Lumpur Tel 603 5628 4888 Fax 603 5635 8200 Mauritius Port Louis Tel 230 208 7644 Tel 230 211 8624 Fax 230 211 4077 Mexico Mexico City Tel 52 55 5328 1400 ext 3008 Fax 52 55 5328 7467 Morocco Casablanca Tel 212 2224 6168 Fax 212 2224 6171 The Netherlands Rotterdam Tel 31 0 10 407 8886 e mail freqconv nl abb com New Zealand Auckland Tel 649 356 2170 Fax 649 357 0019 Nigeria Ikeja Lagos Tel 234 1 4937 347 Fax 234 1 4937 329 Norway Oslo Tel 47 03500 e mail drives no abb com 425 40 Oman Muscat Tel 968 2456 7410 Fax
208. elay Fourth PFA Relay Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Fifth PFA Relay Not allowed Parameter listing and descriptions First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay DI6 Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay DI6 Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay DI6 Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Fifth PFA Relay Free First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third PFA Relay Fourth PFA Relay Fifth PFA Relay Sixth PFA Relay 303 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PEA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays Pana ling po 304 DI DI2 DI3 Free Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay DI6 Free Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay DI6 Free Free Speed Reg Motor First PFA Relay Second PFA Relay Third
209. em is out of balance Check for correct faults in the motor or motor cable Verify that motor cable does not exceed max specified length 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB representative see page 424 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected between the control and main circuit boards Contact your local ABB representative see page 424 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on the main circuit board Contact your local ABB representative See page 424 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB representative see page 424 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct missing mains phase blown fuse 356 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 adequacy of motor braking torque e applicability of torque control brake chopper and resistor 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration block drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB representative see page 424 27 CONFIG FIL
210. eport the error number see page 77 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local ABB representative and report the error number see page 11 37 CBOVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 C Check for and correct excessive ambient temperature e fan failure obstructions in the air flow Not for drives with an OMIO control board 101 E 358 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action k 1002 002 RESERVED i l Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside the range 128 128 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside the range 128 128 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside the range 128 128 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside the range 128 128 Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active Sa values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1301 MINIMUM Alt gt 1302 MAXIMUM Al 1304 MINIMUM AI2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1504 MINIMUM A01 gt 1505 MAXIMUM AOT 1510 MINIMUM AO2 gt 1511 MAXIM
211. er USER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter When parameter 2907 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter Parameter listing and descriptions 231 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Description Range 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 0 3 Defines the drive response if the analogue input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in the reference chain 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT set the minimum limits 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 All LOSS or 8 AI2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 Al1 LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets the speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 Al1 LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets the speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analogue input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3
212. er 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Note Motor models work with internal parameters and user defined motor parameters In creating a model the drive does not change any user defined parameters 0 OFF IDMAGN Disables the Motor Id Run creation process Does not disable the operation of a motor model 1 2 ON Enables a Motor Id Run at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to O Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range To perform a Motor Id Run 1 De couple load from motor or otherwise reduce load to near zero 2 Verify that motor operation is safe The run automatically operates the motor in the forward direction confirm that forward rotation is safe The run automatically operates the motor at 50 80 of nominal speed confirm that operation at these speeds is safe 3 Check following parameters if changed from factory settings 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of motor rated speed e 2003 MAX CURRENT gt 100 of by value The maximum torque parameters 2014 2017 and or 2018 gt 50 4 On the control panel select Select PARAMETERS Select group 99 Select parameter 9910 Parameter listing and descriptions 161 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 01 OPERATING DATA This group contains drive operating data including actua
213. es 28 Motor CADES AA AA 28 Control cables 32 TOOIS FOOUIFOC asas t isied piede chased Caec ctetu 35 Checklist for installation preparations 36 3 Installing the ANY etii ir trii ere tdeo erasa ass 37 What this chapter contains sues 37 Preparing the mounting location 37 Removing front cover IP54 38 Table of contents 1 ACH550 01 User s Manual Removing front cover IP21 sss sees eee eee 39 Mounting the drive IP54 40 Mounting the drive IP21 sss 41 Overview of wiring installation R1 R4 42 Overview of wiring installation R5 R6 43 Power wiring IPD econ 44 Control wIBIDIG R54 liada 47 Power Wiring 1P2 Dia 48 Control MATO BZ aa Seen cae odios bua 51 Check installation 53 Re install Cover IP54 ir 55 Re install cover IP21 esee 56 PND DIV DOW CF nagbasa NAA 57 4 Start up and control panel 59 What this chapter Contains ee eee eee 59 Control panel compatibility sss 59 HVAC control panel ACH CP B features 59 SCAM HUD c M 60 MOdOS aena a a a 63 Output Standard display mode 64 Par
214. es have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R3 located at the top of the drive and R4 located in front of the drive 1 Remove power from the drive R1 R3 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the centre to release the barbs 4 When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that e the fan air flow is up refer to the arrow on the fan e the fan wire harness is R4 toward the front 5 e the notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner e the fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive f N 3 2 p 7 f f YI IR Ef IN ABS u a FM Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from the drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order Restore power AN 3AUA000000404 Ole ques Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Capacitors Reforming The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed re aged if the drive has been non operational for more than o
215. eter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 100 159 Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel e See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter e See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter e See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM 0 9 Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 0 127 Selects the units used for the second display parameter e See parameter 3405 3413 JOUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter e See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 100 159 Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel e See parameter 3401 3416 SSIGNALS3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter e See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUTS DSP FORM 0 9 Defines t
216. exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2903 IREVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 Mrev Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter e Value is compared to parameter 2904 value 0 Disables the trigger 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 6553 Mrev Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter When parameter 2903 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 Resets the parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter e Value is compared to parameter 2906 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh When parameter 2905 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter 0 0 Resets the parameter 230 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter e Value is compared to parameter 2908 value 0 0 Disables the trigg
217. f start stop and direction commands 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1003 DIRECTION 1 3 Defines the control of the motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Serial communications 143 ACH550 01 User s Manual Reference signal source selection Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference
218. ference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLY BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency Parameter listing and descriptions 213 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 IDC MAGN TIME 0 10s Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Set the pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 DC HOLD CTL O NOT SEL 2 DC BRAKING Selects whether DC current is used for braking 0 NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC injection braking Enables DC injec
219. ference decreases If both digital inputs are active or inactive the reference does not change Note When constant speed 1 is activated using digital input 3 DI3 the reference speed is the value of parameter 1202 The value remains as the reference speed when digital input 3 is deactivated 106 Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Floating point 1 SCR A Al Not used ES AGND Analogue input circuit common 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analogue input circuit common a AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA ope A DAA Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC GND Common for DI return signals Ei Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Reference up Activation increases the reference 18 DIE Reference down Activation decreases the reference Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable enable with parameters 1601 and 1608 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Signal cable shield screen Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Constant speed 1 par 1202 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive E a NIO Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 co
220. for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS350 ACS550 and ACH550 3AFE68735190 English esotomasyon com 3 Installing the drive 5 Application macros and wiring 6 Real time clock and timed functions 7 Serial communications 8 Parameter listing and descriptions 3AFE68258537 REV E 40 Technical data EFFECTIVE 20 08 2007 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual Table of contents 1 Contents Of this manual ee eenn nnn 5 What this chapter contains 5 Compatibilty AA AA 5 Intended AA 5 Intended audience sese 5 Use of warnings and notes eee eee eee eee 6 Safety instructions eee 6 DING PALAGE NIIT IA 9 Lifting the drive AA 10 Product and service inquiries ssss 11 Product alientan 11 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 11 2 Preparing for installation 13 What this chapter contains sese 13 Drive identification sesiones 14 aNG A PP AA 17 Motor identificatiON occcoonnnnncnnnnnnncnnanonnnononanoos 19 Motor compatibillty eias Ren rne ou maana 21 Suitable environment and enclosure 22 Suitable mounting location ssssssesse 23 Wiring and EMC considerations 26 Cabling instructions see eee 28 Input power mains cabl
221. g Digital inputs Relay outputs Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACH550 is powered down Technical data 395 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source X1 18 DIS NPN connection sink X1 TeDe For using an external power supply see the diagrams below PNP connection source 0V DC 12 24 V DC 396 X1 18 DIS 12 24 V DC 0 V DC 3 NPN connection sink X1 Tepe Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Communications Terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications Use shielded cables X1 Identification Hardware description SCR Screen For the connection diagram and additional information see section Embedded fieldbus EFB on page 132 A Negative AGND SCR Screen Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Cooling Cooling specifications Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Free space around the e 200 mm 8 in above an
222. ge ripple exceeds 1496 of the nominal DC Check for input power supply imbalance 2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by CURVE parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Diagnostics and maintenance 367 ACH550 01 User s Manual Maintenance intervals 368 WARNING Read the safety instructions on page 6 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check dustiness of the and cleaning Main cooling fan replacement Internal enclosure cooling fan replacement IP54 units Capacitor reforming Capacitor replacement frame twelve years sizes R5 and R6 See Heatsink on page 369 Depends on the environment 6 12 months Every six years See Main fan replacement on page 369 See nternal enclosure fan replacement on page 372 Every year when Se
223. gital input DI2 DI6 as the Run enable signal e See DI INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 2 Determines if the control panel operator keypad can change parameter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros e This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values e The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory e Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory Parameter listing and descriptions 197 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 Entering the correct pass code unlocks the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above Code 358 opens the lock This entry reverts back to 0 automatically FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digi
224. hange logic When the output from the PID PFA control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACH550 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires e external switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV e the PFA input is below the level set by parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Parameter listing and descriptions 299 300 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Note The ACH550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure PID output A 100 P 8119 3PFA r P 8122 m P8118 re P8118 B A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL autochange not allowed B Autochange occurs 1PFA etc PID output associated with each motor Initiates a change when the running time since the last autochange reaches 811
225. hange the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive Accelerates the motor Calculates values for proportional gain and integration time Changes parameters 2301 and 2302 to these values Resets 2305 to OFF Parameter listing and descriptions 223 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Description Range 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL OZOFF 1 ON Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges 0 OFF Disables the critical speeds function 1 2 ON Enables the critical speeds function Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz foutput Units are rom unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ in which case units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less tha
226. hanical system is changed to thermal energy in the motor The flux braking works in vector control mode only i e when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 0 oFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature Braking torque 120 Without flux braking Rated motor power 1 2 2 kW 2 15 kW 3 37 kW 4 75 kW 5 250 kW 226 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 100 V 2 Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent overheating Typical IR compensation values are 380 480 V drives Py KW IR comp V e When enabled IR compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR compensation for example in applications that require a high breakaway torque Motor voltage A IR compensated B No compensation 604 IR COMP FREQ 0 100 Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in 96 of motor frequency 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications SQUARED is more silent for most operating frequencies Parameter listing and descriptions 227
227. he communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode Serial communications 135 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5318 EFB PAR 18 0 65535 For Modbus only Slave response delay Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the drive begins transmitting response to the master request BACnet specific communication parameters 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 Sets the BACnet MS TP response turn around time in milliseconds 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 Sets together with parameter 5317 EFB PAR 17 BACnet instance IDs Forthe range 1 to 65535 This parameter sets the ID directly 5317 must be 0 For example the following values set the ID to 49134 5311 49134 and 5317 0 For IDs 65535 The ID equals parameter 5311 s value plus 10000 times parameter 5317 s value For example the following values set the ID to 71234 5311 1234 and 5317 7 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 Sets the BACnet Device Object Max Info Frames property 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 Sets the BACnet Device Object Max Master property 5316 EFB PAR 16 0 65535 Indicates
228. he decimal point location for the third display parameter e See parameter 3404 Parameter listing and descriptions 247 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT 0 127 Selects the units used for the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter e See parameter 3406 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 248 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are shown below One sensor Motor Three sensors AO1 AGND 10 nF WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth Parameter listing and descriptions 249 ACH550 01 User s Manual To fulfil this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insu
229. he gain of the PID controller The setting range is 0 1 100 At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value e At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system e A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response e If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure e Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until th
230. he last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing on 04 page 353 for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display 02 FAULT TIME 1 date dd mm yy power on time in days Day on which the last fault occurred Either as Date if real time clock is operating e Number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 time hh mm ss Time at which the last fault occurred Either as e Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating e The time since power on less the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set 0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 5 FREQ AT FLT Frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 6 VOLTAGE AT FLT DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred Wane AT FLT Motor torque 96 at the time the last fault occurred STATUS AT FLT NSG status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0 DI 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 binary Status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 7 CURRENT AT FLT z Motor current A at the time the last fault occurred Parameter listing and descriptions 171 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description
231. he stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME The drive coasts to stop A fault indication is displayed 2 ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME An alarm indication is displayed The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME Torque Current Stall region P 3011 Stall frequency 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 Hz This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function See the figure for parameter 3010 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3017 EARTH FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables 0 DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays a fault 16 EARTH FAULT and the drive coasts to stop 236 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 IO COMM and sets the speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value I WARNING If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the fieldbus communication is lost 019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 60 0 s Sets the communication fault time us
232. hen using serial communication the ACH550 can receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analogue inputs and the control panel operator keypad or be monitored only drive signals status data and O Serial communications 131 ACH550 01 User s Manual Embedded fieldbus EFB To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 ohm resistors at both ends of the network See the diagram below Terminated Terminated station Station Station station Nee NET REDE Use preferably three conductors and a shield for the connection ACH550 RS485 Terminal block X1 e 3 g D s 5 O o a o a z 2 CC 1 O O aa c c 05 29 30 31 32 ev E Preferred wiring 3 conductors with shield SC B SS Wu Note 3 Shield Notes 1 Use three conductor cable Tie the third wire ae to AGND X1 31 See Note 4 SG v C GO 2 Set switch J2 to OFF Bus termination is an Ground J active network Pull up amp pull down BIAS Sec Note 5 Reference resistors are on board the ACH550 drive oe 3 Tie shield wires together at the drive Do Building automation NOT terminate at SCR controller 4 Terminate shield ONLY at the Ground terminal in the building automation
233. hnical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Hardware description mu a Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 250 mA reference to GND Short circuit protected Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 24 10 V or lt 10 V between the input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the ACH550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop 14 Digital input 2 programmable Default not used 15 DIS Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed 1 parameter 1202 16 DI4 iem input 4 programmable Default Start enable 1 parameter 1608 Digital input 5 programmable Default not used Digital input 6 programmable Default not used RO1C Relay output 1 programmable RO1A Default Ready a Maximum 250 V AC 30 DC 2A 21 RO1B_ Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default Running RO2A i Maximum 250 VAC 30VDC 2A RO2B Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA RO3C Relay output 3 programmable RO3A Default Fault 1 Maximum 250 V AC 30 V DC 2 A RO3B Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See chapter Application macros and wirin
234. ible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 Defines the multiplier as a percentage plus or minus used in the trim mode CORRECTION SRC 1 PID2REF 2 PID20UTPUT Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2REF Uses appropriate REF MAX Switch A OR B e 1105 REF1 MAX when REF is active A 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active B PID2OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ IF 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ Ramped ref Switch Select Trimmed ref par 4230 Ext ref 1 max A off Ext ref 2 max B propor Abs max speed direct Select freq C par 4232 a Trimming PID2 ref PID2 Trimming PID2 out 282 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE This group defines set up variables for an external fieldbus communication module Refer to the communication module documentation for more information on these parameters Code Description Range 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not connect
235. ic shell Lift R6 drives by their lifting holes 40 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Mounting the drive IP21 1 Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners 2 Warning stickers in different languages are supplied with this manual Attach a warning sticker in the appropriate language on the inside plastic shell 1 Lift R6 drives by their lifting holes Installing the drive 41 ACH550 01 User s Manual Overview of wiring installation R1 R4 The figure below shows an overview of the terminal layout for frame sizes R1 R4 J1 DIP switches for analogue inputs two switch types can be used J1 J1 Hg E lo Alt in voltage position 0 2 10 V SKI PLZ Al2 in current position 0 4 20 mA Panel connector FlashDrop option Power LED Green Fault LED Red X1 Analogue inputs and outputs and 10 V ref voltage output X1 Digital inputs and 24 V aux voltage output Optional module 1 Extended relay output module X1 Communications RS485 Modbus FLN N2 BACnet Optional module 2 Plug in fieldbus X1 Relay outputs J2 J5 DIP switches for RS485 termination J2 J5 J2 J5 off position on position Frame Power input Power output to motor sizes 3 phase U1 V1 W1 py V2 W2 EM3 LA R5 R6 1 phase U1 live W1 diffe
236. ications with two constant speeds active PID and alternating PID between two setpoints using digital inputs When using a transmitter the signal can be used as the process actual value for the PID controller Al2 or as a direct speed reference Al1 PID setpoints are set to the drive internally with parameters 4011 set 1 and 4111 set 2 and they can be changed with DI3 PID can be commissioned and adjusted with parameters or with the PID assistant recommended Digital input DI2 has a factory set control location EXT1 EXT2 selection function When digital input is active the control location is EXT2 and PID is activated Digital inputs 4 DI4 and 5 DI5 have factory set constant speed 1 and 2 functions Constant speed 1 par 1202 is selected by activating digital input 4 DI4 and constant speed 2 par 1203 by activating digital input 5 DI5 Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 1 SCR mur an AGND Analogue input circuit common SF EE mans E EJE E 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA OT Mares Analogue input circuit common pA Mr AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S au AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U eee Analogue output circuit common 24V GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation takes PID in u
237. idden by the FlashDrop device are not visible Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 17 OVERRIDE This group defines the source for the override activation signal the override speed frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled The override feature can be used e g in fire situations When the override DI is activated the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset speed or frequency When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots If the start command Run enable and Start enable are active in the AUTO mode the drive starts automatically and continues normally after override mode In the HAND mode the drive returns to the OFF mode When override is active Drive runs at preset speed Drive ignores all keypad commands Drive ignores all commands from communication links Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation deactivation Run enable and Start enable Drive displays alarm message 2020 OVERRIDE MODE The following faults are ignored DEV OVERTEMP EM DC UNDERVOLT Al LOSS Al2 LOSS Al2LOSS O o MOTOVERTEMP EXT FAULT 1 15 EXTFAULT 2 18 THERM FAIL 21 CURR MEAS SUPPLY PHASE OVERSPEED SERIAL 1 ERR EFB CON FILE FORCE TRIP Parameter listing and descriptions 205 206 31 33 ACH550 01 User s Manual EFB 1 EFB2 EFB 3 MOTOR PHASE CB OVERTEMP 38 38 USER LOAD C
238. if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value Serial communications 149 ACH550 01 User s Manual PID control feedback source selection Description Range 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 19 Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 150 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analogue input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 150 Analogue input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B JC value 5096 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and Al1 for values 14 17 B Correcting reference Al for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where 022595 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis FBK SEL 1 13 Defines the PID controller feedback
239. ime to 8 AM Then set the start and stop days to Monday and Friday Now time period 1 is set 3 Go to parameters 3606 3609 and set the start time to 4 PM and stop time to 6 PM Then set the start and stop days to Monday and Friday Now time period 2 is set 4 Goto parameters 3610 3613 and set the start time to 10 AM and stop time to 12 AM Then set the start and stop days to Saturday and Sunday Now time period 3 is set Real time clock and timed functions 125 ACH550 01 User s Manual 5 Goto parameters 3614 3617 and set the start time to 8 PM and stop time to 10 PM Then set the start and stop days to Saturday and Sunday Now time period 4 is set 6 Create the timer by going to parameter 3626 TIMER 1 SRC and select all the created time periods P1 P2 P3 P4 7 Goto Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS and select Timer 1 in parameter 1201 CONSTANT SPEED Now timer 1 acts as the source of constant speed selection 8 Setthe drive to AUTO mode for the timer to function Note For more information about the Timed functions see Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS on page 253 Boost The boost function operates the drive for a certain predetermined time The time is defined with parameters and activated with a selected digital input The boost time starts running after the digital input has been activated momentarily Boost must be connected to the timers and selected when a timer is created Boost is typically used for amplified air ventilation
240. ing to section Wiring and EMC considerations on page 26 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Control wiring IP54 1 On each control cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen for the cable clamp Also strip the individual wires Clamp the control cables 3 Connect the control wires to the drive terminals N Tightening torque 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft i WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding For completing the connections go to chapter Application macros and wiring Installing the drive 47 ACH550 01 User s Manual Power wiring IP21 1 Open the appropriate knockouts in the connection box 2 Install the cable clamps for the input power and motor cables 48 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual 3 Install the connection box and tighten the cable clamps Note The connection box can be left out in cabinet installations if the cabinet is grounded Screen the connection 360 in the cubicle Installing the drive 49 ACH550 01 User s Manual 4 Onthe input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires 5 On the motor cable strip th
241. inputs timed constant speed selection timed relay activation For more information see Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Note To be able to use the timed functions the internal clock has to be set first For information on the Time and date mode see chapter Start up and control panel Note The timed functions work only when the control panel is connected to the drive Note Removing the control panel for upload download purposes does not affect the clock Note Daylight saving changeover is automatic if activated Real time clock and timed functions 117 ACH550 01 User s Manual Using the timer The timer is configured in four stages They are 1 Enabling the timer Configure how the timer is activated See page 120 2 Setting the time period Define the time and day when the timer operates See page 121 3 Creating the timer Assign the selected time period to certain timer s See page 122 4 Connecting the parameters Connect selected parameters to the timer See page 123 TIME PERIOD 1 2 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 TIME PERIOD 2 3606 START TIME 2 NEED 3 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 3609 STOP DAY 2 TIMER 2 METEO 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 TIMER 3 3612 START DAY 3 Ci IPDA 3628 TIMER 3 SRC TIME PERIOD 4 TIMER 4 3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMER 4 SRC 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Star
242. ions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for ExT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 D11 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input e See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMER 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the timer Timer activated EXT2 Timer de activated EXT1 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10 12 TIMER 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the timer See TIMER 1 above 1 DI1
243. ipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding For completing the connections go to chapter Application macros and wiring 52 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Check installation 33 Check SS ra preparations have been com pleted according to the installation checklist EN The drive is mounted securely The space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling Suitable mounting location on page 23 The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For IT systems corner grounded TN systems and residual current circuit breakers the inter nal EMC filter is disconnected Overview of wir ing installation R1 R4 on page 42 Overview of wiring installation R5 R6 on page 43 The drive is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive s nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as speci fied The input power mains fuses and mains switch are installed nput power mains cable fuses and circuit breakers on page 381 The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the mo
244. is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org PROFIBUS DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Tel 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Tel 1 262 785 3200 1 800 HELP 365 Fax 1 262 785 0397 ABB Limited Daresbury Park Daresbury Warrington Cheshire WA4 4BT UNITED KINGDOM Tel 44 1925 741 111 Fax 44 1925 741 693 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Tel 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 Internet www abb com Z UU 9 Lc gt N UU co Ko MA ir Lu BS kE BO LL LLI ib Sui ABB Ltd Plot No 5 8 6 I Phase Peenya Industrial Area Bangalore 560 058 INDIA Tel 91 80 2294 9585 Fax 91 80 2294 9389 2007 ABB Oy All rights reserved
245. ivated from I O or disabled with parameters Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 10 a Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Constant speed 1 par 1202 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 95 ACH550 01 User s Manual 5 Condenser 96 This application macro is for condenser and liquid cooler applications where the fan speed is controlled according to the signals received from the transducer See the figure below When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using
246. ive To switch back to AUTO mode press the C9 key Start Stop To start the drive press the HAND WD or AUTO key To stop the drive press the OFF key E Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is highlighted in inverted colour press the UP or DOWN keys the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified in the HAND mode It can be parameterized using Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT to also allow modification in the AUTO mode Start up and control panel 65 ACH550 01 User s Manual Parameters mode 66 To change the parameters follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Select the appropriate parameter group with the oe keys and press EL Select the appropriate parameter in a group with the UP DOWN keys Press EDIT to change the parameter Press the UP DOWN keys to change the parameter value Press SAVE to store the modified value or press CANCEL to leave the set mode Any modifications not saved are cancelled Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to the main menu To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see chapter Parameter listing and descriptions Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual For detailed hardware description see chapte
247. ive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 238 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR AI MIN O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Sets the automatic reset for the analogue input less than the minimum value function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation An WARNING When the analogue input signal is res
248. l signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Description Range 0101 SPEED DIR 30000 30000 rpm Calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 speed he value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm Calculated speed of the motor rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency Hz applied to the motor Also shown by default in the OUTPUT display 0104 CURRENT type dependent Motor current as measured by the ACH550 Also shown by default in the OUTPUT display 0105 TORQUE 200 200 Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of the motor nominal torque 0106 POWER type dependent Measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 Van DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACH550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 Vau Voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 150 C Temperature of the drive heatsink in Celsius EXTERNAL REF 1 0 300000 rpm 0 500 Hz External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 162 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 100 0
249. l setpoint PID with constant speeds 13 E bypass USA only 14 Hand control Application macros and wiring 85 ACH550 01 User s Manual Selecting an application macro To select an application macro follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER Scroll to Application and press SEL Select a macro with the UP DOWN keys and press SAVE If you want to use the mechanical HAND OFF AUTO switch press OK If you do not want to use it select No with the DOWN key and then press OK To be able to use the switch EXT1 HAND Start command must be connected to DI1 and EXT2 AUTO Start command to DI6 86 Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Restoring defaults To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default Application macros and wiring 87 ACH550 01 User s Manual 1 HVAC default 88 The HVAC default application macro is used e g for typical BMS applications The factory set configuration of inputs and outputs of the drive is as shown in the figure on page 89 When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the fe
250. lation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analogue inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Usean external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figures below show thermistor relay and PTC sensor connections using a digital input At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 or 6 THERM 1 Thermistor relay Thermistor relay Control board 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 PTC sensor Control board w For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 250 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used PT100 C PTC ohms or thermistor See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL O NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor Analogue output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement f
251. lay Par 0134 Binary RO6 ROS RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 j00000 1 1 1 1 t1 ft 1 q00001 1 1 1 1 1 0 9 990010 1 0 O X 3 Qqo00 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 q00100 1 1 1 0 1 ft 5 62 o 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 47 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Serial communications 145 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 0 47 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay 412 loutputs 4 6 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 99 159 Defines the content for analogue output AO1 135 COMM VALUE 1 Energize output based on the input from fieldbus communication parameter 0135 136 COMM VALUE 2 Energize output based on the input from fieldbus communication parameter 0136 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Minimum value refers to the P 1504 minimum content p 4510 AO CONTENT value that will be converted to an P 1502 1508 analogue output AO mA ere P 1505 parameters P 1511 content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for P 1504 the outp
252. listing and descriptions 265 ACH550 01 User s Manual PID controller Advanced The ACH550 has two separate PID controllers 1 Process PID PID1 and 2 External PID PID2 Process PID controller PID1 Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 set 1 defined in Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Process PID PID1 set 2 defined in Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 The user can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Typically two different PID controller sets are being used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another External PID controller PID2 External PID PID2 which is defined in Group 42 EXT TRIM PID can be used in two different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware External PID can be set to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve through outputs of the ACH550 In this case parameter 4230 TRIM MODE has to be set to value 0 default value External PID PID2 can be used as an additional PID controller to Process PID PID1 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACH550 266 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed Code Description Range 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 Defines t
253. lling the ACH550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off Note The ACH550 should only be mounted where all of the requirements defined in chapter Preparing for installation are met and the checklist has been completed Preparing the mounting location 1 Use the mounting template to mark the position of the mounting holes ie 2 Drill the holes 3 Insert the screws halfway into the holes Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Installing the drive 37 ACH550 01 User s Manual Removing front cover IP54 1 Loosen the captive screws four or five depending on the size of the frame around the edge of the cover 2 Remove the cover 38 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Removing front cover IP21 1 2 3 4 Remove the control panel if attached Loosen the captive screw at the top Push side clamps in Pull up to lift the cover Installing the drive 39 ACH550 01 User s Manual Mounting the drive IP54 1 Remove the rubber plugs by pushing from the outside 2 Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners 3 Place the protective plugs over the screws 4 Warning stickers in different languages are supplied with this manual Attach a warning sticker in the appropriate language on the inside plast
254. lly The automatic saving and loading of the override parameter set is defined by Group 17 OVERRIDE 158 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 9904 9 9 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 96 10096 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 200 600 V US 230 690 V Defines the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor The ACH550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the mains voltage Output voltage P 9905F Output frequency 906 MOTOR NOM CURR type dependent Defines the nominal motor current MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 3 SCALAR FREQ Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is speed reference in 96 10096 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Or Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 ln where Iy is drive current 9907 MOTOR N
255. lly 1PFA speed regulated motor 2PFA 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFA speed regulated motor 3PFA 1st auxiliary motor 1PFA last auxiliary motor The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFA I LOCK When the ACH550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory If the PFA relay configuration is changed or if the PFA enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above Parameter listing and descriptions 301 ACH550 01 User s Manual 8120 INTERLOCKS 302 Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled e An interlock is active when its command signal is absent e An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACH550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFA I LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a
256. lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with a 500 ms time limit for the operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without a maximum time limit for the operation MINIMUM FREQ 500 500 Hz Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range See the figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ MAXIMUM FREQ Freq 2007 value is lt 0 P 2008k ll Frequency range allowed Time 2007 value is gt O Frequency range allowed gt Time Frequency range allowed 210 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 500 Hz Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 6 7 Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 0 MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as th
257. lt logs To set the clock follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Scroll to TIME amp DATE with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER to go to the Time and date mode Scroll to CLOCK VISIBILITY with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL to change the visibility of the clock Scroll to SHOW CLOCK with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL to make the clock visible Scroll to TIME FORMAT with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL The time formats are displayed Select a format with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL to confirm the selection Start up and control panel 79 80 ACH550 01 User s Manual Scroll to DATE FORMAT with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL The date formats are displayed Select a format with the UP DOWN keys and press OK to confirm the selection Scroll to SET TIME with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Change the hours and minutes with the UP DOWN keys and press OK to save the values The active value is highlighted in inverted colour Scroll to SET DATE with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Change the days months and year with the UP DOWN keys and press OK to save the values The active value is highlighted in inverted colour Scroll to DAYLIGHT SAVING with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual 14 To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off with the UP DOWN keys
258. ltage 10 V DC O Al2 Not used Hm Analogue input circuit common ab AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA o pom Signal cable shield screen Output current 0 4 20 mA j 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V HG GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive in the timer mode DI2 DI3 LA paa DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Boost Momentary activation starts the boost function Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 105 ACH550 01 User s Manual 10 Floating point This application macro is for applications where speed reference needs to be controlled through digital inputs DI5 and DI6 By activating digital input 5 the speed reference increases By activating digital input 6 the speed re
259. m 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 4000 ohm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 350 Co c lt m A Alt NOT SEL 341 al 0 0 341 100 0 UE 341 DIRECT DIRECT 341 V mA 341 0 0 V 0 0 mA 342 10 0 V 20 0 mA 3421 Par index ooa ESI ET spect va A EM Co A Parameter listing and descriptions 335 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Pme lindol 1 2 3 a s 6 name index TIMERS START TIME 1 3602 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 NOT SEL 336 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal time c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand o7 s j o m n v m ta inder NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 3601 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 3602 ao MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY 3605 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 360 o N 361 w s 2622 P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 562 2628 NOT SEL 3629 o N alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control Par Parameter listing and descriptions 337 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser um NOT SEL Par index 3701 NOT SEL NOT SEL 3702 FAULT FAULT FAULT F
260. m limit used See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DI1 INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 Sets the first minimum limit for torque Value is a percentage of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 Sets the second minimum limit for torque Value is a percentage of the motor nominal torque 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 600 0 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percentage of the motor nominal torque 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 600 0 Sets the second maximum limit for torque Value is a percentage of the motor nominal torque 212 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 21 START STOP This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACH550 supports several start and stop modes Code Description Range 2101 START FUNCTION 1 8 Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL
261. mbination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 11 DIJU 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 Ald AI2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 15 Ald AI2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 17 AM AI2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 180 Parameter listing and descriptions 179 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for
262. meter 270 derivation filter parameter 269 derivation time parameter a na naano aaan 269 deviation data parameter o 165 error feedback inversion parameter 269 external source activate parameter 281 external trimming parameter group 281 feedback multiplier parameter nnn naana nanana 273 feedback select parameter 150 273 feedback data parameters 164 Gain parameter esan e meets hm pot dederas acides 267 integration time parameter 268 internal setpoint parameter o o o ooooooo 272 omset parameter pagan AANI ia 281 output data parameters 164 parameter set select parameter 279 process sets parameter groups 267 280 scaling 0 100 parameters n nnna anann 270 setpoint maximum parameter 272 setpoint minimum parameter aaao oaaao 272 setpoint select parameter 150 271 setpoint data parameters 164 sleep delay parameter nnn nananana aaa 278 sleep level parameter a 277 sleep selection parameter 276 sleep alarm code eee 366 trim mode parameter eee eee 282 trim scale parameter eee ees 282 units actual signal parameter 270
263. motors The ACH550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump so that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFA automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFA also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump so that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFA adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops so that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFA automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFA also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFA skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc
264. n or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rom unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ in which case units are Hz 224 224 Parameter listing and descriptions listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2503 Parameter listing and descriptions 225 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL This group defines variables used for motor control Description 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE OZOFF 1 ON Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 oFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING O OFF 1 ON Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor when needed instead of limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in the motor the energy of the mec
265. nabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value 5 0 Parameter setting ACH550 relay assignment Autochange enabled E No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as standard PID control Parameter listing and descriptions 297 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 336 h Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval between changes he Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 interlocks value gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts H Relay Logic Logic H J p EA Il PFA with Autochange mode 298 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 8119 JAUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 Sets an upper limit as a percentage of output capacity for the autoc
266. nd 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the Emergency stop command e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above TORQ BOOST CURR 0 300 Sets the maximum supplied current during the torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION START DELAY 0 00 60 00 s Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes If START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown Parameter listing and descriptions 215 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 22 ACCEL DECEL This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one of these Description Range 201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 6 6 Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs with one
267. ne year Without reforming capacitors may be damaged when the drive starts to operate It is therefore recommended to reform the capacitors once a year See page 76 for how to check the date of manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS350 ACS550 and ACH550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Replacement The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by an input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected see page 424 Replacements for frame sizes R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Diagnostics and maintenance 3 3 ACH550 01 User s Manual Control panel 374 Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032
268. ng the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 INV above Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 7200 rpm 0 0 120 Hz Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL e See the figure A PID output level B PID process feedback t lt P 4024 P 4026 Stop Start C P 4025 4005 1 P 4025 4005 2 0 D t Parameter listing and descriptions 277 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 s Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above WAKE UP DEV unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 4107 Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY restarts the PID controller Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale Parameter 4005 0
269. nic currents produced by equipment connected to public low voltage systems IEC EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive 2004 systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive 2003 systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition CE marking A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC Compliance with the EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European 418 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Union The EMC product standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 420 C Tick marking The ACH550 carries C Tick marking C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility S
270. nication speed of 115 2 kb s the drive in kbits per second kb s 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive 5203 PARITY 0 3 Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors Parameter listing and descriptions 285 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check e Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffe
271. nnected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 107 ACH550 01 User s Manual 11 Dual setpoint PID 108 This application macro is intended for dual setpoint PI D applications where process PI D controllers setpoint can be changed to another value by activating digital input 3 DI3 Process PI D setpoints are set to the drive internally with parameters 4011 set 1 and 4111 set 2 When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Dual setpoint PID 1 SCR wur an AGND Analogue input circuit common SF EE mans E EJE E 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al oa Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit
272. o 100 the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of Start up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from nominal Output current 96 relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 P 3007 100 P 3008 50 Frequency 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed e Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 234 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values lol IN lg Output current hy Nominal motor current fo Output frequency fark Break point frequency A Trip time Parameter listing and descriptions 235 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 2 This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User limit is defined in scalar mode by 2003 MAX CURRENT in Group 20 LIMITS and in vector mode by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used 1 FAULT When the drive operates in t
273. oes not include user sets override set internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters This is recommended when using the same application for drives of different sizes e DOWNLOAD USER SET 1 Copies the parameters in user set 1 from the control panel to the drive A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters Start up and control panel 73 ACH550 01 User s Manual User set 1 must be first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO and then uploaded to the control panel before downloading is possible DOWNLOAD USER SET 2 Copies the parameters in user set 2 from the control panel to the drive As DOWNLOAD USER SET 1 above e DOWNLOAD OVERRIDE SET Copies the parameters in the override set from the control panel to the drive The override must be first saved automatically as defined by Group 17 OVERRIDE and then uploaded to the control panel before downloading is possible Upload to Control Download control panel full set panel HP y HE a Downloading the full set of parameters from one drive to similar drives using the same application running identical motors Upload to Control Download control panel application panel m i Downloading the same application to different drive sizes us ing the same application Save user set 1 2 par 9902 to drive
274. of flow calculation Prompts for units Prompts for maximum flow Prompts for transmitter signals Low Noise Set up Prompts for the switching frequency Prompts for the definition of Flux optimization Prompts for the use of Critical speeds Panel Display Prompts for display variable and unit settings Prompts for the use of Timed functions Outputs Prompts for the signals indicated through the relay outputs Prompts for the signals indicated through the analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 Sets the minimum maximum scaling and inversion values Serial Prompts for communication settings Communication Prompts for control access settings Start up and control panel 71 ACH550 01 User s Manual Changed parameters mode The Changed parameters mode is used for viewing changed parameters The mode shows those parameters whose values differ from the default values of the application macro currently in use To access the Changed parameters mode follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select CHANGED PAR with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER A list of the changed parameters is displayed Press EXIT to exit the Changed parameters mode and again to return to the main menu 72 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual Drive parameter backup mode Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to panel s
275. ojojo o o 562 oem Jom dom pom om 36 COMM 1 Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes a binary code in parameter 0134 that energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the table below e 0 De energize the relay 1 Energize the relay Par 0134 Binary RO6 ROS RO4 RO3 RO2 ROT 0 j00000 1 11111 1 t ft 2 Qq0000 1 1 1 1 0 ft 9 000011 1 T 3T 1 9 4 q00100 1 1 1 0 1 ft 54682 oe qon lm lm lum e in pe pepe 37 TIMER 1 Energize the relay when timer 1 is activated See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 38 40 TIMER 2 4 Energize the relay when timer 2 4 is active See TIMER 1 above 41 MNT TRIG FAN Energize the relay when the cooling fan counter is triggered 42 MNT TRIG REV Energize the relay when the revolutions counter is triggered 43 MNT TRIG RUN Energize the relay when the run time counter is triggered 44 MNT TRIG MWH Energize the relay when the power consumption counter is triggered 45 OVERRIDE Energize the relay when override is activated 46 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active 47 USER LOAD C Energize the relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs Parameter listing and descriptions 191 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 47 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay o
276. ol for forcing the ramp input to O 0 NOT SEL Not selected 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to O according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O The command word is supplied through fieldbus communication 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O De activating the digital input forces ramp input to O Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O See DI1 INV above 218 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 23 SPEED CONTROL This group defines variables used for speed control operation Code Description Range 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 0 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller Larger values may cause speed oscillation he figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Not
277. on Range 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0 0xFFFF Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is Xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 142 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Drive control parameters After the fieldbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the tables below should be checked and adjusted where necessary The Setting for fieldbus control amp description column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal as well as a description of the parameter For fieldbus signal routes and message composition see manuals Embedded Fieldbus EFB Control JAFE68320658 English and BACnet Protocol 3AUA0000004591 English Control command source selection Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range 001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands e See the fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration o
278. ontrol panel operator keypad mounting IP54 402 control panel operator keypad mounting IP66 403 drive mounting susto certe ta rue sand etse bte 9 37 terminal layout lago MCCC 42 Pam Baan ieee Gn ae celi a fui erai s 43 terminals Cable sc ea iee de eek eh es eh hee de oes 388 fg EUER EM ae ma An DUE 394 test date parameter cen kd eae eee bee ome ken 243 thermal fail fault code haa E RO ies PA e EEG URS 356 time and dale mode id 79 time period start day parameters eee 255 start time parameters eee eee 255 stop day parameters eee eee 255 stop time parameters cee eee eee 255 timed autochange parameter a 312 Med TUNGTIONS arce ned da BRA tee ee de ee KAN 117 boost select parameter 256 boost time parameter a 257 parameter groups ar a KA REN KALAN MAR NAN 253 start day parameters 0 0 cee ees 255 start time paraMeterS o o ooooooommomoooo 255 stop day parameters a 255 stop time parameters a 255 timer source parameters 257 timers enable parameter cee eee 254 HIG AA AA 118 enable parameter a 254 aampunin O desse ttu 125 source parameter an ER kaha 257 Tmax circuit breaker aaa aea BEES Sires 383 384 385 TN system warning about EMC filters 7 TOP CONGR Ke 9 419 torque at fault hist
279. or temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0150 CB TEMP 20 0 150 0 C Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives always show the constant value of 25 0 C 0151 INPUT KWH R 0 0 999 9 kWh pc actual intake energy in kWh 0152 INPUT MWH 0 9999 MWh Calculated actual intake energy in MWh 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 166 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS This group monitors fieldbus communications See also chapter Serial communications Code Description Range 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O display 0001 All zeros
280. ory parameter n 0c eee 171 boost current parameter eee eee 215 data parameter nanana aaaea bh Dia oud ae 162 max limit select parameter 212 max limit parameters aaa 212 min limit select parameter 211 min limit parameters a 212 A e GO NG aed ec AT duxit o d PG eh 11 trim mode PID parameter aes 282 trim scale PID parameter eee eee 282 Index 449 ACH550 01 User s Manual two wire sensor connection example 116 LVDS COU siar dace dr denen hispid ut Rho hi ete A i o E as 16 U U f ratio DAFatelor saaan o eb ree x ex Xe Rd RN 227 DE mat TnS aec dd o pare et ae ine P s EM aa ES 419 underload curve see user load curve undervoltage alan codes c pn R EER ee See E ace SS 364 automatic reset parameter 239 control enable parameter o 210 units PID parameler s a o o o hr oy ea tate nee es 270 unknown drive type fault a 361 unsymmetrically grounded network see corner grounded TN system uploading parameters ees 73 user load curve parameter group cd asi ui eo o ERU a 259 alarm code vod epa mt od etra ulus qune educi 367 fault coden EE 358 frequency parameters 260 function parameter n nanana 0c eee eee eee ee 259 mode parameter llle 259 time Dararmelef 3 5 agen rire aet we mate der eR ep
281. pervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 e See parameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel operator keypad as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets using parameter 9902 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI INV above Parameter listing and descriptions 199 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 1606 LOCAL LOCK 6 8 Defines control for the use of the HAND mode The HAND mode allows drive control from the control panel operator keypad e When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to HAND mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lo
282. protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 10 om Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Boost Momentary activation starts the boost function Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 103 ACH550 01 User s Manual 9 Internal timer with constant speeds Powered roof ventilator This application macro is intended e g for timed powered roof ventilator applications which alternate between two constant speeds constant speed 1 and 2 with a built in timer This macro also has a boost function which activates constant speed 2 after digital input 3 DI3 has been momentarily activated See the figure below For further information see chapter Real time clock and timed functions Copyright 2007 ABB 104 Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal timer with constant speeds SCR Al Not used B AGND Analogue input circuit common 10V Reference vo
283. r EM1 See the Be ene following pages m ez EN cS 7 X0003 The figure shows the R3 frame size Other frame sizes have similar layouts WARNING For IT systems corner grounded TN systems and residual current circuit breakers remove screws at EM1 and EM3 to disconnect the EMC filter Note that when the EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible 42 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Overview of wiring installation R5 R6 The figures below show the general terminal layouts for frame sizes R5 R6 R5 R6 Fi F2 PE 7 MAs GND GND Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 Power input 3 phase U1 Vi Wi D 1 phase U1 live W1 i LY hd X0013 PE GND Power output to motor U2 V2 W2 WARNING For IT systems corner grounded TN systems and residual current circuit breakers remove screws at F1 and F2 to disconnect the EMC filter Note that when the EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible Installing the drive 43 ACH550 01 User s Manual Power wiring IP54 1 Cutthe rubber cable seals as needed for the 1 power 2 motor and 3 control cables 44 A A A nstalling the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual 2 On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires Also strip the individual wires 3 Onthe motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose
284. r The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 286 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol Refer to the communication protocol documentation for more information on these parameters Code Description Range 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol 53 Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 02 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 Defines the node address of the RS485 link he node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 Defines the communication speed of 38 4 57 6 76 8 kb s the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 2 Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol O ABB DRV LIM Operation of the Control Word and Status Word 3 conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in
285. r rotation or change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 58 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate poor connections and or noise on line 2006 Al LOSS Analogue input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e input source and connections parameter that sets the minimum 3021 parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2007 Al2 LOSS Analogue input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check input source and connections parameter that sets the minimum 3022 parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 364 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Alarm P may 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e the drive is in local control mode the control panel displays HAND or the drive is in remote control mode AUTO and parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check communication lines and connections parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is AUTO 2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEV OVERTEMP OVERTEMP fault may be near R1 R4
286. r Technical data Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To replace the displayed value of a parameter with the default value press the UP DOWN keys simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are the following parameter groups Group 99 START UP DATA Group 10 START STOP DIR Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS Group 20 LIMITS Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and Group 42 EXT TRIM PID Note To restore the default factory settings select the HVAC default application macro Start up and control panel 67 ACH550 01 User s Manual Assistants mode 68 The Start up assistant guides you through the basic programming of a new drive You should familiarize yourself with basic control panel operation and follow the steps outlined above At the first start the drive automatically suggests first selecting the language The assistant also checks the values entered to prevent entries that are out of range The Start up assistant is divided into assistants each of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set for example References 1 amp 2 or PID control You may activate the assistants tasks one after the other as the Start up assistant suggests or independently from a menu Note If you want to set the parameters independently us
287. ra d 88 irnterial HIT s uod i eee ae nes oae ed me 102 internal timer with constant speeds 104 powered roof ventilator oooooocoooo 104 pump alternation n CR USER UE UE URP SS 100 COUTO eo Cece tras bed hex 92 SUDDIV Talis coupe ots dengue oe ares Suc nare 90 o d pex TER RE joy pute R efe Big tao alee pa 64 ASSISIAMS AA 68 auto control see AUTO mode AUTOTIO0G a dettes ooa uti eoo aa di dens 64 65 autochange alar Code scire en E 366 interval parameter o 298 level parameter acordar radar 299 OVOLVIOW Kin Ka arte oc 02 RRS ip ee AA aval pee 299 starting order counter asaan eaa 301 timed parameter a csse rear EYES 312 automatic reset see reset automatic autoreset alarm code si aeo be tases hc is 365 auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary 430 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual B DACKUD vafer ettet augur teo DOR Ae rin eae DAS 73 SAS SE x audi ie hace SG et BES turd oa duo indus 130 Paralela erea on eee ae i Ee Var dean ra 136 see also EFB embedded fieldbus battery replacement ves PERA AAO EE EXE A 374 replacement interval oo 368 baud rate RS 232 parameter 285 BMS Building Management System 85 DOOSU Gu ke ha Ru AS Code qa 126 select parameter cece ees 256 time parameter 22 55 exe ac e 257 booster pump application macro n n a aaao oaaae 98 break point frequency fault parameter 2
288. ramp for acceleration and one ramp for deceleration e See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 as the control for ramp pair selection The command word is supplied through fieldbus communication 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 INV above 2 202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in the figure for parameter 2204 Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 216 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550
289. rature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB see page 424 Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Diagnostics and maintenance 369 ACH550 01 User s Manual Main fan replacement frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the drive cover 3 Forframe sizes e H1 and R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover and lift e R3 and R4 Press the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power Arrows in the fan show the directions of the rotation and air flow 370 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Main fan replacement frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the fan 1 Remove power Bottom view R5 from the drive a 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan 3 Disconnect the fan cable 4 Install the fan in reverse order 5 Restore power Arrows in the fan show the directions of 3 the rotation and air flow X0022 Diagnostics and maintenance 371 ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal enclosure fan replacement 372 IP54 UL Type 12 enclosur
290. reen wires must be twisted together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor The same principle applies to cabinet installations Preparing for installation 31 ACH550 01 User s Manual Control cables 32 General recommendation Use shielded cables temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above The figure below shows examples of recommended cables ba Jamak by Draka NK Cables Nomak by Draka NK Cables Figures courtesy of Draka NK Cables Copyright 2003 Draka NK Cables Control cables must be screened and of twisted pair type he screen must be twisted together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analogue l O cables or to either X1 28 or X1 32 for RS485 cables Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable e Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in e Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near to 90 as possible to minimize interference Keep at least 20 cm 8 in away from the sides of the drive e Runrelay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage 30 V Relay controlled signals using less than 30 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows an example of control cable ro
291. rive control panel display if a HVAC control panel is attached to the drive Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation report the situation as an alarm report the situation as a fault Red faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady or flashing showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code Stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following keys removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP or DOWN key The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active 352 Diagnostics and maintenance ACH550 01 User s Manual Flashing green alarms For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms
292. s ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 33 INFORMATION This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description Range 3301 FIRMWARE 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE yy ww Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING XXXY Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where e XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating and Y 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive Parameter listing and descriptions 243 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY This group defines the content for control panel operator keypad display centre area when the control panel is in the Output mode Description Range 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 159 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel Definitions in this group define the display content when the control panel is in the control mode Any Group 01 OPERATING DATA parameter number can be selected
293. s parameter group 244 442 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual see also control panel panel loss alarm sele ak AA ose ue ed on kei NG 365 all COLO zoom Ver pee Ed buc bo Saree Hees aa 355 parameter analogue input scale fault code 359 analogue output scale fault code 359 change lock Qr 197 external relay output fault code 360 fieldbus miss fault code 360 GlOUDS esca ao Pr P I 155 hz rpm fault Code xot PR AR Oke 359 override fault Code 2522 ra bei RAE ae bataan 360 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 360 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 359 PFA and override fault code 360 PEA IO fault GOD yas E AKA AA aa 361 PFA mode fault Gode sr e RC ct 360 PFA ref neg fault code XR eke eee EP 359 save changes parameter 148 200 T See ce cte vd acl eee Wa M A Mababa ip eee GA cy si Re 73 table version parameter cece eee 243 user load curve fault code 361 view parameter css ich o Ru RT ted ED ees 204 parameters elle T addu ore ce dede evt robbed dt 314 list and descriptions s n pe LAYER AL Sham ETE Y 155 MONG cierre sch AA apa pb dudo die dps edere d 66 parity RS 232 parameter o oooooooomooo 285 parity errors count parameter 285 patents x sea ka ros sted do TRA DREW ea
294. s 0 0s 0 0s RO 6 OFF DELAY 1418 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s 0 0s Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control a e e oe on eeu m pos us Fors ous aso s ose ose iso 20 0 iso 100 0 iso Poss ors ors ors ors ots ors ors uo pra STARTEO STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED 140 eee eee w an mun 160 FAULT 14 E A La aos aaa sete EPT E NOT SEL um NOT SEL i NOT SEL m eos f oos f oos f oos Loos o 140 TE aS s oos oos 141 index E E ior p san e pee 141 Parameter listing and descriptions 323 ACH550 01 User s Manual HVAC Cooling Booster default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Parameter Par name index AO1 CONTENT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT 15 ANALOGUE SEL 1501 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ OUTPUTS AO1 CONTENT MIN 1502 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz AO1 CONTENT 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 MAX 1503 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz MINIMUM AO 150 MAXIMUM A01 1505 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA 20 0mA EICTER AO 1506 AO2 CONTENT SEL 1507 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT AO2 CONTENT MIN 1508 0 0A 0 0A 0 0A 0 0A 0 0A 0 0A AO2 CONTENT Defined by Defined by Defined by
295. s appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure e drill e mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size as follows 1 ACH550 01 246A 4 IP21 71 kg 156 Ib 2 ACH550 01 246A 4 IP54 88 kg 194 Ib Note Do not lift frame size R6 without a lifting aid Preparing for installation 35 ACH550 01 User s Manual Checklist for installation preparations Check the frame type of the drive from the identification label Drive identification on page 14 Frame size on page 17 Check the compatibility of the motor and the drive Motor identification on page 19 Motor compatibility on page 21 Check the suitability of the environment and mounting location Suitable environment and enclosure on page 22 Suitable mounting location on page 23 Check that the cables meet the requirements Wiring and EMC considerations on page 26 Motor cables on page 28 Control cables on page 32 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 on page 420 Check that you have the required tools Tools required on page 35 Check that the walls support the drive weight Weights and mounting screws on page 401 36 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Installing the drive What this chapter contains This chapter contains the mechanical and electrical installation procedure of the drive WARNING Before insta
296. s are running e See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running e See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 Parameter listing and descriptions 291 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range START FREQ 1 0 0 500 Hz Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if no auxiliary motors are f Hz running ACH550 output MAX frequency exceeds the limit P 8109 1 P 8115 8109 1 Hz P 8109 output frequency stays above a P8112 MIN relaxed limit 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D After the first auxiliary motor starts Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency increases 1 On Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 Hz Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the
297. s direction or enables direction control Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Defines how the drive selects between command sources Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Defines a set of constant speeds Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Defines the limits and filtering for analogue inputs Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Defines the conditions which activate relay outputs Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Defines the drive s analogue outputs Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS Defines system level locks resets and enables Group 17 OVERRIDE Defines override enabling disabling override activation signal override speed frequency and pass code Parameter listing and descriptions 155 156 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 20 LIMITS Defines minimum and maximum limits for driving the motor Group 21 START STOP Defines how the motor starts and stops Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Defines ramps which control the rate of acceleration and deceleration Group 23 SPEED CONTROL Defines variables for speed control Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Defines critical speeds or speed ranges Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL Defines motor control variables Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG Defines usage levels and trigger points Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Defines faults and responses Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Defines conditions for automatic resets Group 32 SUPERVISION Defines supervision for signals Group 33 INFORMATION Contains software information Group
298. s for Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot as estimated by the drive Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 10 PANELLOSS Panel communication is lost and either e the drive is in local control mode the control panel displays HAND or the drive is in remote control mode AUTO and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check communication lines and connections parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is AUTO 11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed successfully Check for and correct motor connections 12 MOTORSTALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct excessive load e insufficient motor power parameters 3010 3012 Diagnostics and maintenance 355 ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report the first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report the second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT The load on the input power syst
299. s specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating 08A8 8 8 A see the table in section Frame size on page 17 for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC Degree of protection No specification IP21 B055 IP54 Serial number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture YY Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size omo TL sie ACH550 01 Three phase supply voltage 220 240 V jose fese t la sae haa a e 17842 2212 248A2 Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 02A4 4 Ri 03A3 4 Ri 16 9 3 0 Preparing for installation 17 18 ACH550 01 User s Manual aoo A Frame size ACH550 01 owsa e 4 R maa pa s e ma ps e e 246A 4 00467918 xls B Mark the frame size of your drive in the box on the right Note For detailed technical information see chapter Technical data Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Motor identification An example motor rating plate for an IEC motor is shown below 4 CE ABB Oy Electrical Machines 0051 LV Motors Vaasa Finland 3 Motor M3JP 250SMA 4 EExd IIB T4 B3 IEC 25
300. sables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMER 1 4 Defines the timer as the control for enabling external PID control Timer active enables external PID control See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI INV above 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 096 Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value Parameter is not active when 4230 TRIM MODE lt gt 0 i e trim mode is active Parameter listing and descriptions 281 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range TRIM MODE 0 2 Selects the type of trim if any With the trim it is poss
301. se DI3 Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 10 a Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Setpoint selection Set 1 Set 2 DI4 Constant speed 1 par 1202 DI5 Constant speed 2 par 1203 En Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 sek sek sd Qn 1 lG Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Application macros and wiring 111 ACH550 01 User s Manual 13 E bypass USA only 112 This application macro is intended to be used with an electronic bypass device which can be employed to bypass the drive and connect the motor directly on line When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed reference and START command are given through
302. se or Drive is running and at counterclockwise setpoint e Shaft direction is forward or reverse Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing Upper right shows the active reference Centre Using parameter Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY the centre of the LCD display can be configured to display Three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA The default display shows parameters 0103 OUTPUT FREQ in hertz 0104 CURRENT in amperes and 0120 A11 as a percentage Abar meter instead of each signal value 64 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows Lower corners Show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys Lower centre Displays the current time if configured to show the time Operating the drive AUTO HAND The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the AUTO mode remote control and controlled from the Control terminal block X1 To switch to HAND mode local control and control the drive using the control panel operator keypad press the HAND key QE or the OFF key Gp Pressing the HAND key switches the drive to local control while keeping the drive running Pressing the OFF key switches to local control and stops the dr
303. se sod T rb E ico 64 65 EIAS sehn aah Gus Dub date tha ety reta dL ert karag BANG 64 65 motor aux start delay PFA parameter 294 aux stop delay PFA parameter 294 compatibility e a perte AA 21 control mode parameter a 159 id run parameter cio eta npa pa a euh 160 Identification oe uada pra Aes oleate Pe RUE Rater nee aie 19 load curve break point frequency 235 440 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual load curve max fault parameter 234 load curve zero speed load 234 maintenance trigger parameter 230 nominal current parameter lesus 159 nominal frequency parameter 159 nominal power parameter a 160 nominal speed parameter 160 nominal voltage parameter aasan aaraa annn 159 number of aux parameter 295 overtemperature alarm code 365 overtemperature fault code 355 phase fault COCB praan BAR ta 358 revolution counter parameter 230 revolution counter data parameter 165 revolution trigger parameter 230 stall alarm code ius dut hse a dar Nak doh eas 365 Stall fault code Ei a aa 355 starter manual cau aca ata ae 384 temperature alarm limit parameter 252 temperature fault limit parameter
304. section IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 420 12 kHz switching frequency is not available 3 Not tested Sine filters further extend the cable lengths Maximum cable lengths ft for 400 V EMC limits Operational limits IEC EN 61800 3 IEC EN 61800 3 With Second environment First environment du dt category C3 category C2 filters oo ide eo 00 N e wo wo eo LO 00 eo e O N co A CO o No CO 00 CO Ojo 00577999 xls A 1 See the new terms in section IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 420 12 kHz switching frequency is not available 3 Not tested Sine filters further extend the cable lengths Under heading Operational limits the Basic unit columns define the cable lengths with which the basic drive unit works without problems within the drive specification without installing 390 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual any further options Column With du dt filters defines the cable lengths when an external du dt filter is used The columns under heading EMC limits show the maximum cable lengths with which the units have been tested for EMC emissions The factory guarantees that these cable lengths meet the EMC standard requirements If external sine filters are installed longer cable lengths can be used With sine filters the limiting factors are the voltage drop of the cable which has to be taken into account in engineering as well as the EMC limits
305. ser s Manual Wiring and EMC considerations 26 Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these three classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring and control communications wiring Check the operational limits for the allowed maximum motor cable length in section Motor connection on page 389 Ifthe installation must meet the European EMC Directive requirements see section Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 on page 420 check also the EMC limits for the allowed maximum motor cable length in section Motor connection on page 389 Note Non proper wiring is the source of the majority of EMC problems Please follow the instructions to avoid these problems Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows an example of correct wiring Control cable Control cable x i E Na 0 min 500 mm 20 in l min 200 mm 8 in min 300 mm 12 in Input power cable Motor cable Note If an output isolator or contactor is used supply either 2102 STOP FUNCTION value must be 1 COAST
306. size R3 IP54 UL Type 12 ZA4 1 3 ZL2 2 8 Z50 4 1 98 O T 267 0 51 406 C94 10 00 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R4 IP54 UL Type 12 ceo 250 4 1987 29941 760 Technical data 407 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R5 IP54 UL Type 12 408 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R6 IP54 UL Type 12 Technical data 409 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Frame size R1 IP21 UL Type 1 22 2 0 88 828 2 111 Oq 935 1 38
307. speed reference and START command are given through the control panel operator keypad If process PI D is used the feedback signal must be connected to analogue input 2 Al2 By default the setpoint is set from the control panel but it can also be changed to analogue input 1 Process PI D must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 or using the PID control assistant recommended 24 00 22 00 20 00 18 00 16 00 14 00 12 00 10 00 08 00 06 00 04 00 02 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 102 Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal timer 1 SCR mur an AGND Analogue input circuit common SF EE mans E EJE E 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al oa Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit common LL posue mu AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pz GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive in the timer mode DI2 DI3 pu 17 DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 2 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 176 Note The drive starts only if possible
308. ss EDIT Change the highlighted part of the time with the UP DOWN keys Pressing NEXT moves to the next part Press SAVE to save the time Real time clock and timed functions 121 ACH550 01 User s Manual The new value is displayed below the START TIME 1 text Press EXIT to return to the main menu Continue with STOP TIME 1 START DAY 1 and STOP DAY 1 3 Creating a timer Different time periods can be collected in a timer and connected to parameters The timer can act as the source of start stop and change direction commands constant speed selection and relay activation signals Time periods can be in multiple timed functions but a parameter can only be connected to a single timer It is possible to create up to four timers To create a timer follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PARAMETERS with the UP DOWN keys Then press ENTER to go to the Parameters mode Scroll to group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS with the UP DOWN keys and press SEL Scroll to TIMER 1 SRC with the UP DOWN keys and press EDIT The current value is displayed Change the value with the UP DOWN keys Real time clock and timed functions ACH550 01 User s Manual Press SAVE to save the new value The new value is displayed below the TIMER 1 SRC text Press EXIT to return to the main menu 4 Connecting parameters The parameter example 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS has to be connected to the timer so that
309. ss error value PID output Gain P4003 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 Disables the error derivative filter 0 1 10 0 Filter time constant seconds ERROR VALUE INV OzNO 1 YES Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref Parameter listing and descriptions 269 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 4006 UNIT 0 127 Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values Enter the decimal point location counting from the right end of the entry e See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 4007 Value isplay D 00003 B 00031 B 00314 B 14 03142 3 142 1416 096 VALUE unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to the actual values of
310. t Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 a pao E DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 3 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Constant speed 1 par 1202 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 93 ACH550 01 User s Manual 4 Cooling tower fan 94 This application macro is for cooling tower fan applications where the fan speed is controlled according to the signals received from the transducer See the figure below When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode the speed reference must be connected to analogue input 1 Al1 and the START command is given with digital input 1 DI1 In the HAND OFF mode the speed
311. t Stop opens dampers according to period 1 BOOSTER 3622 BOOST SEL Activates PID during set periods 2 and 3 3623 BOOST TIME Changes PID setpoint according gt to period 4 and boost 0 Activates boost DI1 DI6 DI1 INV DI6 INV 118 Real time clock and timed functions ACH550 01 User s Manual 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS TIMER 1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 4 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMER 2 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE TIMER 3 3628 TIMER 3 SRC Parameters connected to a timer The following parameters can be connected to a timer 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS External start and stop command Starts the drive when the timer is activated and stops drive when the timer is deactivated 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS External start and stop command Starts the drive when the timer is activated and stops the drive when the timer is deactivated 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source for start stop commands and reference signals Depending on the selection either EXT 1 or EXT 2 is used as the source for the commands 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Selects a constant speed when timer 1 is active 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Timer energizes a relay output 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Timer energizes a relay output 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Timer energizes a relay output 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
312. t be de activated for timed function enable 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 254 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 Defines the daily start time he time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds If parameter value is 07 00 00 the timer will be activated at 7 a m The figure shows multiple periods on different weekdays 20 30 00 17 00 00 15 00 00 13 00 00 12 00 00 10 30 00 09 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 Defines the daily stop time The time can be set in steps of 2 seconds e If the parameter value is 09 00 00 the timer will be deactivated at 9 a m START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 1 timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY f parameter value is 5 timer 1 weekly will be deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 START TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily start time e See parameter 3602 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 Parameter listing and descriptions 255 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 3608 START DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day e See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY
313. t codes for each fault name Fault name in control panel Drive Fieldbus fault code fault code OVERCURRENT 2310h DC OVERVOLT DEV OVERTEMP SHORT CIRC 4 DC UNDERVOLT B 3220h AI2 LOSS MOT OVERTEMP OPEXPWR o OPEX PWR CURR MEAS SUPPLY PHASE OVERSPEED DRIVE ID CONFIG FILE SERIAL 1 ERR EFB CON FILE 6306h 152 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual CB OVERTEMP 37 USER LOAD CURVE 38 SERF CORRUPT 101 SERF MACRO 103 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 201 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 202 DSP T3 OVERLOAD DSP STACK ERROR 204 CB ID ERROR 5000h EFB LOAD ERROR PARHZRPM oo PARPFAREFNEG iooi 6320h PARAISCALE U eazon Serial communications 153 ACH550 01 User s Manual 154 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Parameter listing and descriptions What this chapter contains This chapter contains the parameter listing of predefined application macros and descriptions of individual parameters for the ACH550 Parameter groups The parameters are grouped as follows Group 99 START UP DATA Defines the data required to set up the drive and enter motor information Group 01 OPERATING DATA Contains the operating data including actual signals Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS Monitors fieldbus communications Group 04 FAULT HISTORY Stores a recent fault history reported by the drive Group 10 START STOP DIR Defines external sources for commands that enable start stop and direction changes Lock
314. t end of the motor L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 aan a terminal box 3 Note The direction of rotation can be changed from the drive but we recommend switching the motor cables to associate the drive forward direction with the clockwise motor rotation Note Now the drive is fully operational for manual operation If you wish to use I O connections refer to chapter Application macros and wiring 58 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Start up and control panel What this chapter contains This chapter contains a brief description of the assistant HVAC control panel operator keypad start up assistant and application selection Control panel compatibility The manual is compatible with the HVAC control panel ACH CP B Rev R with panel firmware version 1 66 or later HVAC control panel ACH CP B features The ACH550 HVAC control panel operator keypad ACH CP B features Status LED M n Green when nor mal if flashing or red see Diagnos tics displays on page 352 UP SOFT always available HAND language selection for the display drive connection that can be made or detached at any time Start up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning copy function for moving parameters to other ACH550 drives backup function for saving parameter sets Start up and control panel 59 ACH550 01 User s Manual e context sensitive help real time clock Start up Start up c
315. tains sse ee eee e System overview mamamana Embedded fieldbus EFB Fieldbus adapter EXT EBA Drive control parameters sse eee xg no 99 9 A se 8 Parameter listing and descriptions What this chapter contains sssssss Parameter groups eeeeseeeeeeeeeee nnne Complete parameter list sssssssse 9 Diagnostics and maintenance What this chapter contains sssssss Diagnostics displays scsi aaa Correcting faultS oooccccooooocononccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnos Fault resetting ME Table of contents 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual piel MOX O 363 Gotftectihg alartmis uo cocco nace rata e ete m te 363 Maintenance intervals sse eee 368 gs AUS INU PORE TETTE UNS 369 Main fan replacement sse ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee 369 Internal enclosure fan replacement 372 CADACHORS rs si AA 373 Control Pa o idas 374 Technical data laan eile o EE Rara do Seno add 375 What this chapter contains 375 Sae arm DIRAS 375 Input power mains cable fuses and circuit le fz is c cT Hc 381 Cable terminal arms 388 Input power mains connection 388 Motor Connectlon ciae hws eee bre x
316. tal input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset Source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 INV above 198 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 Defines control for changing the User Parameter Set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and it does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to su
317. tant speed 1 with digital input DI1 Digital input activated constant speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects constant speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated D1 Di2 Function amp 0 0 No constantspesd 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 Al lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameter listing and descriptions 183 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DI4 e See above DI1 2 for code 10 DI4 5 Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DID See above DI1 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three constant speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven constant speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 D
318. teps below For more information on faults see section Correcting faults on page 353 Press MENU to go to the main menu Scroll to FAULT LOGGER with the UP DOWN keys and press ENTER to go to the Fault logger mode The display shows the fault log starting with the latest fault The number on the row is the fault code see the listing on page 353 To see the details of a fault select it with the UP DOWN keys and press DETAIL Scroll the details with the UP DOWN keys To show the help text press DIAG Scroll the help text with the UP DOWN keys After reading the help press OK to go back to the previous display Press EXIT three times to return to the main menu Start up and control panel 83 84 ACH550 01 User s Manual Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual Application macros and wiring What this chapter contains This chapter contains the application macros used for defining a group of parameters Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Applications The following applications are included in this chapter 1 HVAC default for typical BMS Building Management System applications 2 Supply fan 3 Return fan 4 Cooling tower fan 5 Condenser 6 Booster pump 7 Pump alternation 8 Internal timer 9 Internal timer with constant speeds 10 Floating point 11 Dual setpoint PID 12 Dua
319. ter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 DISU 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except e Uses digital inputs DI5 and DIG 14 Ald AI2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 272 15 Ald AI2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 272 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 272 17 AM AI2 Defines an analogue input 1 A11 and analogue input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analogue input reference correction on page 272 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference 20 PID20UT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Parameter listing and descriptions 271 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range Analogue input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 1
320. th drive firmvare llle 5 MOOG arua E itt Sans an CP Eo o Nani aed d E 21 condenser application macro l l eee eee 96 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 141 283 fault GOD uL os etti e Yh a eqs bie ma a md ms 357 id revision parameter less 141 283 revision parameter l l 141 284 connections COMMUNICATIONS oss ero Cbr e RIDE Y BEER 397 COMO os acd aaa Lara be eue e om EU e re 393 analogue TA cata Du uir ter dd tace dta 394 sls Tale ces tao recep quet P DT ee eas RM 394 relav OUTDIIlS cene dota eee P rhet rane 394 input power mains 2 ee poe da heic ru ER erp 388 3 siio NETT 389 constant speed see speed constant contact Information m A bees 424 control COMMECUONS lt i ace x eura aci EU E e NA der INC wee SOEs 393 LOCATION us uror R aoe ieee M ats e Ert da T Sod die 64 65 location data parameter cee e eee 163 control board overtemperature fault code 00 eee 358 overtemperature fault parameter 237 temperature data parameter 166 control panel operator keypad 59 comm error fault parameter o ooooooo 232 GIMENSIONS ee cei xd E feme ER SS E s 402 display decimal point format parameters 246 display max parameters cee eee 247 display min parameters eee eee 246 display process variables parameter group 244 display selection parameters
321. th the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 420 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 420 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual First environment drives of category C2 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in section Motor cable length on page 390 for the frame size and switching frequency in use WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Second environment drives of category C3 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in section Motor cable length on page 390 for the frame size and switching frequency in use WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is
322. that arise from control panel operation errors flashes the green status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS for bit definitions overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or name Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists Correcting faults The recommended corrective action for faults is 1 Use the Fault listing table on page 353 to find and address the root cause of the problem 2 Reset the drive See section Fault resetting on page 362 Fault listing The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown on the control panel display when the fault occurs The fault names shown in the Fault logger mode see page 83 and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel recommended corrective action TIME 2 faulty motor motor cables or connections OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct excessive motor load insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER Diagnostics and maintenance 858 and maintenance 353 ACH550 01 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and code the panel
323. the PID control assistant recommended a a lt m Q o N de eo gt o o o Application macros and wiring ACH550 01 User s Manual Condenser Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 1 SCR an S AH L HAH EE AGND Analogue input circuit common SE 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al a RE Actual signal 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA AGND Analogue input circuit common LL posue mu AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pz GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 a OE Ed DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 3 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Constant speed 1 par 1202 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default oper
324. the count of MS TP tokens passed to this drive EFB PAR 17 0 65535 Works with parameter 5311 to set BACnet instance IDs See parameter 5311 136 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter EXT FBA Mechanical and electrical installation of the plug in fieldbus The plug in fieldbus adapter EXT FBA module is inserted into expansion slot 2 of the drive The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also provide the earthing of the cable shield connected to the module and interconnect the GND signals of the module and the control board of the drive On installation of the module the signal and power connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting procedure See the figures on page 738 1 Insert the module carefully into expansion slot 2 of the drive until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit gland box and install the cable clamp gland for the network cable 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp gland 5 Connect the network cable to the network connector of the module Detailed configuration is available in the appropriate EXT FBA manual 6 Tighten the cable clamp gland 7 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw Serial communications 137 ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure
325. the load current of the drive In any case the cable must be between the minimum limit defined in this table and the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see section Cable terminals on page 388 Technical data 387 40 ACH550 01 User s Manual Cable terminals Mains and motor cable maximum sizes per phase as well as control cable maximum sizes accepted at the cable terminals and the tightening torques are listed in the following table Maximum Torque Maximum Torque Maximum Torque wire size wire size wire size ae pe pa fo fe pa m pem m e m ps ps 5 Jo o fr m ew PP pp p Values given for solid wires 00467918 xls B For stranded wires the maximum size is 1 mm AWG s 164 AW im WG lo 16 Input power mains connection Input power mains connection specifications Voltage U 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase or 1 phase 10 15 for 230 V AC units 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase 10 15 for 400 V AC units Prospective Maximum allowed prospective short circuit short circuit current in the supply is 65 kA in a second current providing that the mains cable of the drive is IEC 629 protected with appropriate fuses US 65 000 AIC Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental 0 98 at nominal load power factor cos phi 388 Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual Input power mains connection specifications Cable 90 C 194 F rating minim
326. ting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault To clear the fault history all of Group 04 FAULT HISTORY parameters follow these steps 1 Inthe control panel Parameters mode select parameter 0401 2 Press EDIT 3 Press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously 4 Press SAVE Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Use Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm a 2001 OVERCURRENT The current limiting controller is active Check for and correct excessive motor load insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE The overvoltage controller is active Check for and correct static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Diagnostics and maintenance 363 ACH550 01 User s Manual Alarm a 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE The undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct e undervoltage on mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either do not attempt to change the direction of moto
327. tion and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power Thus the PFA Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter Parameter listing and descriptions 309 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 8123 PFA ENABLE 0 NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE Selects PFA control When enabled PFA control Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 8 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 NOT SEL Disables PFA control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFA control 310 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 1800 s Sets the PFA acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFA acceleration ramp applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies
328. tion braking after modulation has stopped f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed e f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION IS 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp 2106 DC CURR REF 0 10096 Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 250 s Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT 0 OFF 1 ON Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in the following situation a new start command is required Afault is reset 0 OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function 214 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual cene pes ptn Range 09 EMERG STOP SEL 6 6 Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Requires an external stop command and removal of the Emergency stop command before the drive can restart 0 NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop comma
329. to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number e Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 0xFFFF Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification File configuration information depends on the drive application program 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 0xFFFF Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS iol Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The major or minor revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision differs from that stated in the drive s configuration file 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number s Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Serial communications 141 ACH550 01 User s Manual Descripti
330. tor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified Installing the drive HY NG the drive 53 54 ACH550 01 User s Manual NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shav ings are inside the drive as a bypass connection is connected no volt age is applied to the output of the drive E NO alternate power source for the motor such Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Re install cover IP54 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover 3 Re install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP54 Installing the drive 55 ACH550 01 User s Manual Re install cover IP21 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 Re install the control panel 56 Installing the drive ACH550 01 User s Manual Apply power WARNING Always re install the front cover before turning power on WARNING The ACH550 will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on at I O 1 Apply input power 2 Green LED is lit Note Before increasing motor speed check that the motor is running in the desired direction Note If you want to generate a fault to check the I O select HAND mode and remove the control panel Installing the drive 57 ACH550 01 User s Manual The figure below shows changing the direction of motor rotation seen from the shaf
331. tored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Parameter listing and descriptions 239 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 32 SUPERVISION This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Description Range 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101 159 Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 OPERATING DATA 101 159 Supervises parameter 0101 0159 If the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO s HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO lt HI See the figure on page 241 C
332. tores all parameters including two user sets and an override set to the drive control panel operator keypad The full set partial parameter set application user sets and override set can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery Depending on the motor and application the following options are available in the Drive parameter backup mode e UPLOAD TO PANEL Copies all parameters from the drive to the control panel This includes all defined user parameter sets override parameter set and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run e BACKUP INFO Shows the following information about the drive whose parameters have been uploaded to the panel drive type drive rating and FW firmware version DOWNLOAD FULL SET Restores the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user parameter sets or the override parameter set Note Use the Download full set function only to restore a drive from a backup if something has gone wrong or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system DOWNLOAD APPLICATION Copies a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to the drive The partial set d
333. troller output after an error step when the error remains constant K Gain 1 i Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 Ts Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples Controller output Error value e Error value t Parameter listing and descriptions 221 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description 2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0 600 00 s Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation e Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of the derivative action e Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine he figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed t 222 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN OZOFF 1 ON Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 OFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected e Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed C
334. ture alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize the relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 All LOSS Energize the relay when Al1 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS Energize the relay when AI2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize the relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize the relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 PID SLEEP Energize the relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFA Use the relay to start stop motor in PFA control See Group 81 PFA CONTROL Use this option only when PFA control is used Selection activated deactivated when the drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize the relay when PFA autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFA control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize the relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque the motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER MACRO 2 Energize the relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active 190 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 35 COMM Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes a binary code in parameter 0134 that energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the table below 0 De energize the relay 1 Energize the relay Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 o oewo o
335. uency 0 4 20 mA mu S ma AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA U 9 AGND Analogue output circuit common 10 24V pz GND Common for DI return signals Digital input common for all DM Start Stop Activation starts the drive DI2 DI3 a OE Ed DI5 Start enable 2 Deactivation stops the drive 18 DIE Not used Not available if PID is activated 2 Disable enable with parameters 1601 1608 and 1609 3 The sensor needs to be powered See the manufacturer s instructions A connection example of a two wire 24 V DC 4 20 mA sensor is shown on page 116 Note The drive starts only if possible protection functions Run enable or Start enable 1 and 2 are activated from I O or disabled with parameters Signal cable shield screen External reference 1 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 10 a Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Run enable Deactivation stops the drive Constant speed 1 par 1202 Start enable 1 Deactivation stops the drive Relay output 1 par 1401 Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Relay output 2 par 1402 Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 Relay output 3 par 1403 Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Application macros and wiring 99 ACH550 01 User s Manual 7 Pump alternation This application macro is intended for pump alternation applications usually used
336. uit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC BRK and UDC BRK WARNING Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes before removing the cover To check measure for zero voltage at the DC terminals which are depending on the frame size UDC BRK and UDC BRK WARNING Even when the power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACH550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 RO3 and if the relay extension board is included in the installation RO4 RO6 6 Contents of this manual ACH550 01 User s Manual WARNING When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the units or an external supply WARNING If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged Note When the EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible For disconnecting the
337. ult Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump Par name index COOLING 901 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh COOLING 2902 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 2906 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 0 kh 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 0 0 MWh 30 FAULT 3001 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL FUNCTIONS PANEL COMM 3002 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 300 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 3004 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050s 1050s 100 100 100 100 100 100 2 2 2 O e e 3 O me o gE Co NO n2 n o o o al Rh ow TRIG gt 0 gt 2 non OC ICIOMVMI2O 2 AzZlazilA lt lA lt 20 4 SI a c tel el mj m a Y O O o Z Z USER MWH TRIG 90 USER MWH eo AI lt MIN c Z O a O Z gt O ERE e ao o mm mmim gt x lt gt x lt 0 EE Qm as NZ Z7 gt gt r r Hi MOT THERM PROT 00 MOT THERM TIME 00 MOT LOAD CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD BREAK POINT 300 wo wo oO o o IN O lO 0 eo STALL 3010 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL STALL Y 30t1 200Hz 20 0Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz STALL TIME 0 eo T E Z O a O Z
338. um temperature rating Motor connection Motor connection specifications Voltage Up 0 U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency 0 01 Hz resolution See section Ratings on page 375 Field 10 500 Hz weakening point Switching Selectable 1 4 8 or 12 kHz See the frequency availability according to the drive power in the table below Power kW 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 45 480 x x x 182 x x j Cable 90 C 194 F rating minimum temperature rating Maximum See section Motor cable length below motor cable length Technical data 389 10 ACH550 01 User s Manual Motor cable length The tables below show the maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V drives with different switching frequencies Examples for using the table are also given Maximum cable lengths m for 400 V EMC limits Operational limits IEC EN 61800 3 IEC EN 61800 3 With Second environment First environment du dt category C3 category C2 filters 8 12 1 4 kH Z ww O O eb e eo wo e O e O e e al Oo C2 CO oo Oj O A lo o b ES or ci O ho N Oo ooo k mob oo So ho N oo o O O N e O e e oo mah l mm CLO olojo O oO k e e wo O O O e Nm 09 olojo ojojo ai OJo o E Co e eo ala Oi O1 O D Co 00577999 xls A 1 See the new terms in
339. unction 0 NOT SEL No timers have been selected 1 P1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 P2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 P1 P2 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 P3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 P1 P3 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 P2 P3 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 P1 P2 P3 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 P4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 P1 P4 Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 10 P2 P4 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 11 P1 P2 P4 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 12 P3 P4 Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 13 P1 P3 P4 Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 14 P2 P3 P4 Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 15 P1 P2 P3 P4 Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 16 BOOST Boost B selected in the timer 17 P14B Time Period 1 and Boost selected in the timer 18 P2 B Time Period 2 and Boost selected in the timer Parameter listing and descriptions 257 ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 19 P1 P2 B Time Periods 1 and 2 and Boost selected in the timer 20 P3 B Time Period 3 and Boost selected in the timer 21 P1 P3 B Time Periods 1 and 3 and Boost selected in the timer 22 P2 P3 B Time Periods 2 and 3 and Boost selected in the timer 23 P1 P
340. unction reads the voltage through analogue input Al1 or AI2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses one PTC The analogue output feeds a constant current through Excessive the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input Al1 and converts it into ohms The table below and the graph above show typical PTC sensor resistance as a function of the motor operating temperature 21 5 kohm Parameter listing and descriptions 251 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 5 THERM 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a normally closed thermistor relay or a PTC sensor to a digital input When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the connection figures on page 250 The table below and the graph on page 251 show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24 V and digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature gt 28 kohm
341. urrent S200M S200P S200 B C B C B C ACH550 mg 03A3 4 10 04A1 4 10 05A4 4 10 06A9 4 B 15A 4 ENS 4 Im 23A 4 R2 23 0 ci 38A 4 NE 0 E 045A 4 89 EN EIN EN EN EN mana h om EN EN EN CI P k P h 00577998 xls A Technical data ACH550 01 User s Manual ABB Tmax moulded case circuit breakers MCCB Type ABB Tmax moulded case circuit breaker E EE Tmax Tmax Electronic Prospective rating uae EN EN ME 01 038A 4 R3 380 160 63 50 pasa fo loo fe ho goo bo Fora Re fero ra peo o ko roaa Re eoo fa fo 250 ks posa Re eso ra so po ks 00577998 xls A Technical data 385 ACH550 01 User s Manual Input power mains cable The following table gives copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table Dimension the cables according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive In any case the cable must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see section Cable terminals on page 386 Based on Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 NEC Table 310 16 for copper PVC insulation Wires 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 90 C 194 F wire insulation 70 C 158 F surface temperature 40 C 104 F am
342. ush buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior the pulse in DI1 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 4 DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DIS DI3 activated Reverse DI3 de activated Forward Parameter listing and descriptions 173 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 5 DI1P 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop e Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DIS must be activated during the pulse in DI1 e Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DIS must be activated prior the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple St
343. ust be active parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET SET 1 Override direction parameter 1706 OVERRIDE DIR can be either O FORWARD or 7 REVERSE 208 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 20 LIMITS This group defines minimum and maximum limits to be followed in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Code Description 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range See the figure Speed 2001 value is 0 P 2002 Speed range allowed Time P2001 Speed 2001 value is gt O P2002 Speed range allowed P2001 7 7 _ 0 Time P 2001 Speed range allowed P 2002 Am QU 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed 2003 MAX CURRENT depends on drive type Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor Parameter listing and descriptions 209 ACH550 01 User s Manual Description Range 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 2 Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the
344. ustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of O Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz DC STABILIZER O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation 0 DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Parameter listing and descriptions 229 ACH550 01 User s Manual Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG This group defines usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel operator keypad signals that maintenance is due Description Range 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter 2 e Value is compared to parameter 2902 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter When parameter 2901 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter
345. ut See P 1510 the figure P 1503 1509 AO CONTENT P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analogue output 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA Sets the minimum output current 146 Serial communications ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for A01 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified See the figure for parameter 1303 in chapter Parameter listing and descriptions 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 159 Defines the content for analogue output AO2 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM A02 0 20 0 mA Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above 1512 FILTER AO2 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above System control inputs Code Setting for fieldbus control amp description Range RUN ENABLE 6 7 Selects the source of
346. uting D D JJ LET kg 7 qp G Control cable Control cable rdi res a ou i ae min 500 mm 20 in min 200 mm 8 in i UE NE o Input power cable Motor cable Note Do not mix relay controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control signals in the same cable Note Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Preparing for installation 33 34 ACH550 01 User s Manual Analogue cables Recommendations for analogue signal runs Use double shielded twisted pair cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal e Ground at one end only Digital cables Recommendations for digital signal runs e Adouble shielded cable is the best alternative but a single shielded twisted multipair cable is also usable Control panel operator keypad cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only twisted pair ethernet cable For example Standard CAT5 UTP Ethernet Patch Cable wiring 568 B Maximum length is 3 meters Preparing for installation ACH550 01 User s Manual Tools required To install the ACH550 you need the following e screwdrivers a
347. utput 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 47 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 36 Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event Eu On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set Relay status E cac to PFA 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 s See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 s See RO 1 ON DELAY 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 0 47 IDefines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay 1412 loutputs 4 6 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 s See RO 1 ON DELAY 192 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Code Description Range 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 s See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0 3600 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 5
348. ve follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN keys Scroll to DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and press SEL Text Downloading parameters application is displayed Press ABORT if you want to stop the process Text Parameter download successfully completed Press OK to return to PAR BACKUP menu Press EXIT twice to go to the main menu Note If upload or download of parameters is aborted the partial parameter set is not implemented Start up and control panel 77 ACH550 01 User s Manual To download the user set 1 user set 2 or override set to a drive follow these steps Press MENU to go to the main menu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN keys Scroll to DOWNLOAD USER SET1 USER SET2 OVERR SET and press SEL Text Downloading parameters user set 1 user set 2 override set is displayed Press ABORT if you want to stop the process After the download stops the message Parameter download successfully completed is displayed Press OK to return to the PAR BACKUP menu Press EXIT twice to go to the main menu 78 Start up and control panel ACH550 01 User s Manual Time and date mode The Time and date mode is used for setting the time and date for the internal clock of the ACH550 In order to use the timed functions of the ACH550 the internal clock has to be set first Date is used to determine weekdays It is shown in Fau
349. vee base ees 230 counter data parameter llli sess 165 trigger parameter cerddi R RRR e ees 230 RS 232 baud rate parameter 000 eee 285 panel parameter group 2 2 00 cee eee ee 285 parity parameter xac ca cpu saree Sea ete 285 station id parameter llli 285 RS 232 counts buffer overruns parameter oo 286 CRC errors parameter 286 frame errors parameter 00 ce eee eee 286 OK messages parameter eee ees 285 parity errors parameter 285 l cix cares nd eR ne eae Gah Hea e doe RC T A 397 termination for EFB 0 0 0 0 cee 132 run enable source select parameter nunana nanana 147 197 run time cooling fan counter parameter 230 cooling fan trigger parameter 230 drive counter parameter llle sss 230 drive trigger parameter a 230 run time data parameter eee 163 165 S S200 B G circuit breaker 2 suse ks Tube en 383 384 Safely instructions iua as qup asa EISPEEEPSRSS 5 6 scalar control mode eset uu dran PA ER rp ANG 159 Screws MOUNTNO n NANA PATLANG ran eee t eh wei be 401 s curve ramp parameter cee eee ees 217 second environment co 420 sensor type parameter 0 ce es 251 sensorless vector control mode 159 serial 1 error fault code lt a oe ae eee AR ete ee 357 serial communication sche SLA WAN AGA ee D
350. wake up delay parameter o oooooooooooo 278 wake up deviation parameter noana n onae na 278 PINE S Lege eai ap ben eod ntes te CRU E a 396 power data parameter 0 3 da eo ELE 162 drive consumption counter parameter 231 drive MWh consumption trigger parameter 231 supply external sse Ee ERE LER eA UTE S 396 powered roof ventilator application macro 104 previous faults history parameters 172 444 Index ACH550 01 User s Manual process PID sets parameter groups 267 280 process variables data parameters 165 product Ino f EE 11 taining pa aaya P AE PC 11 proportional gain parameter 0 eee eee 219 protection degree of IP code 22 PT100 temperature Sengar 0000s 251 PTC temperature sensor llle een 251 pump alternation application macro sssaaa saaana 100 R ramp pair accel decel parameter 149 216 A aaan E E AEEA AA T EE Ee Ar u aa 375 ratings IEC 208 240 V drives KAGAD GAP NA KG ba 377 380 480 V drives uut e e tees e Re PRN ee XII ERE AN 376 real time ClOCK uso lat En 79 117 reference analogue input corrections n nanona aaan 180 corrections for parameter values 180 keypad control parameter 0c eee 176 maximum parameters cece eee eee 181 minimum parameters secu un eee aes beso EE 180 select source par
351. z CONST SPEED 3 1204 15 18 Hz 15 18 Hz 15 18 Hz 15 18 Hz 15 18 Hz 15 18 Hz CONST SPEED 4 1205 20 24 Hz 20 24 Hz 20 24 Hz 20 24 Hz 20 24 Hz 20 24 Hz CONST SPEED 5 1206 25 30 Hz 25 30 Hz 25 30 Hz 25 30 Hz 25 30 Hz 25 30 Hz CONST SPEED 6 1207 40 48 Hz 40 48 Hz 40 48 Hz 40 48 Hz 40 48 Hz 40 48 Hz CONST SPEED 7 1208 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz TIMED MODE SEL 1209 CS1 2 3 4 CS1 2 3 4 CS1 2 3 4 CS1 2 3 4 CS1 2 3 4 CS1 2 3 4 320 Parameter listing and descriptions ACH550 01 User s Manual Internal Dual Dual Pump Internal timer c Floating setpoint setpoint Hand alternation timer speeds point PID PID c sp E bypass control ar Loo 9 j m n j Ee REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm Hz rpm 1101 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 1102 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 1104 52 0Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0H 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0Hz 50 0 Hz 1560 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 62 0 Hz 60 0Hz 60 0Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 60 0Hz 60 0 Hz 1105 1860 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm p PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT Ag 1106 nor 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0

EN / ACH550-01 User`s Manual Rev E - inverter - plc

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents